FLIR Systems FLIRT8210 Infrared Camera User Manual

FLIR Systems AB Infrared Camera

User Manual

User’s manualFLIR T5xx series
User’s manualFLIR T5xx series#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US iii
Table of contents1 Disclaimers ......................................................................................11.1 Legal disclaimer .......................................................................11.2 Usage statistics ........................................................................ 11.3 Changes to registry ...................................................................11.4 U.S. Government Regulations......................................................11.5 Copyright ................................................................................11.6 Quality assurance .....................................................................11.7 Patents...................................................................................11.8 EULATerms ............................................................................11.9 EULATerms ............................................................................12 Safety information .............................................................................23 Notice to user ...................................................................................63.1 User-to-user forums ..................................................................63.2 Calibration...............................................................................63.3 Accuracy ................................................................................63.4 Disposal of electronic waste ........................................................63.5 Training ..................................................................................63.6 Documentation updates .............................................................63.7 Important note about this manual..................................................63.8 Note about authoritative versions..................................................74 Customer help ..................................................................................84.1 General ..................................................................................84.2 Submitting a question ................................................................84.3 Downloads..............................................................................95 Quick start guide ............................................................................. 105.1 Procedure............................................................................. 105.2 To keep in mind ...................................................................... 106 Register the camera......................................................................... 116.1 General ................................................................................ 116.2 Procedure............................................................................. 117 A note about ergonomics ................................................................. 167.1 General ................................................................................ 167.2 Figure .................................................................................. 168 Camera parts ..................................................................................178.1 View from the rear................................................................... 178.1.1 Figure........................................................................ 178.1.2 Explanation................................................................. 178.2 View from the front .................................................................. 188.2.1 Figure........................................................................ 188.2.2 Explanation................................................................. 188.3 View from the bottom............................................................... 198.3.1 Figure........................................................................ 198.3.2 Explanation................................................................. 198.4 Laser distance meter and laser pointer ........................................ 198.4.1 General...................................................................... 198.4.2 Laser transmitter and receiver......................................... 208.4.3 Difference in position .................................................... 208.4.4 Laser warning label....................................................... 218.4.5 Laser rules and regulations ............................................ 219 Screen elements ............................................................................. 229.1 General ................................................................................ 229.2 Menu system ......................................................................... 229.3 Soft buttons........................................................................... 239.4 Status icons and indicators ....................................................... 23#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US v
Table of contents9.5 Swipe-down menu .................................................................. 249.6 Image overlay information......................................................... 2410 Navigating the menu system ............................................................. 2510.1 General ................................................................................ 2510.2 Navigating using the navigation pad............................................ 2511 Handling the camera........................................................................ 2611.1 Charging the battery................................................................ 2611.1.1 General...................................................................... 2611.1.2 Using the stand-alone battery charger to charge thebattery....................................................................... 2611.1.3 Using the USB battery charger to charge the batterywhen it is inside the camera............................................ 2611.1.4 Charging the battery using a USB cable connected to acomputer.................................................................... 2711.2 Installing and removing the camera battery................................... 2711.2.1 Installing the battery...................................................... 2711.2.2 Removing the battery .................................................... 2711.3 Turning on and turning off the camera.......................................... 2811.4 Adjusting the angle of lens ........................................................ 2811.4.1 Figure........................................................................ 2811.4.2 Procedure .................................................................. 2911.5 Adjusting the infrared camera focus manually ............................... 2911.5.1 Figure........................................................................ 2911.5.2 Procedure .................................................................. 2911.6 Autofocusing the infrared camera ............................................... 2911.6.1 General...................................................................... 2911.6.2 Figure........................................................................ 3011.6.3 Procedure .................................................................. 3011.7 Continuous autofocus .............................................................. 3011.7.1 General...................................................................... 3011.7.2 Procedure .................................................................. 3111.8 Operating the laser distance meter ............................................. 3111.8.1 General...................................................................... 3111.8.2 Procedure .................................................................. 3111.9 Measuring areas..................................................................... 3211.9.1 General...................................................................... 3211.9.2 Procedure .................................................................. 3211.10 Connecting external devices and storage media ............................ 3211.10.1 General...................................................................... 3211.10.2 Figure........................................................................ 3311.10.3 Explanation................................................................. 3311.11 Moving files to a computer ........................................................ 3311.11.1 General...................................................................... 3311.11.2 Procedure .................................................................. 3311.12 Assigning functions to the programmable buttons .......................... 3411.12.1 General...................................................................... 3411.12.2 Procedure .................................................................. 3511.13 Using the camera lamp as a flash ............................................... 3511.13.1 General...................................................................... 3511.13.2 Procedure .................................................................. 3511.14 Changing camera lenses .......................................................... 3611.15 Neck strap............................................................................. 4011.16 Hand strap ............................................................................ 4012 Saving and working with images ....................................................... 4212.1 About image files .................................................................... 42#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US vi
Table of contents12.1.1 General...................................................................... 4212.1.2 File-naming convention ................................................. 4212.1.3 Storage capacity .......................................................... 4212.1.4 About UltraMax............................................................ 4212.2 Saving an image..................................................................... 4312.2.1 General...................................................................... 4312.2.2 Procedure .................................................................. 4312.3 Previewing an image ............................................................... 4312.3.1 General...................................................................... 4312.3.2 Procedure .................................................................. 4312.4 Opening a saved image............................................................ 4412.4.1 General...................................................................... 4412.4.2 Procedure .................................................................. 4412.5 Editing a saved image.............................................................. 4412.5.1 General...................................................................... 4412.5.2 Procedure .................................................................. 4412.5.3 Related topics ............................................................. 4512.6 Zooming an image .................................................................. 4512.6.1 General...................................................................... 4512.6.2 Procedure .................................................................. 4512.7 Deleting images ..................................................................... 4612.8 Resetting the image counter...................................................... 4612.8.1 General...................................................................... 4612.8.2 Procedure .................................................................. 4613 Working with the image archive......................................................... 4713.1 General ................................................................................ 4713.1.1 Managing folders via soft button ...................................... 4713.2 Opening image and video files................................................... 4713.3 Creating a new folder............................................................... 4813.4 Renaming a folder................................................................... 4813.5 Changing the active folder ........................................................ 4813.5.1 General...................................................................... 4813.5.2 Procedure .................................................................. 4813.6 Moving files between folders ..................................................... 4913.7 Deleting a folder ..................................................................... 4913.8 Deleting an image or video file ................................................... 4913.8.1 General...................................................................... 4913.8.2 Procedure .................................................................. 4913.9 Deleting multiple files............................................................... 5013.9.1 General...................................................................... 5013.9.2 Procedure .................................................................. 5013.10 Deleting all files ...................................................................... 5013.10.1 General...................................................................... 5013.10.2 Procedure .................................................................. 5014 Achieving a good image ................................................................... 5114.1 General ................................................................................ 5114.2 Adjusting the infrared camera focus ............................................ 5114.2.1 Manual focus............................................................... 5114.2.2 Autofocus................................................................... 5114.2.3 Continuous autofocus ................................................... 5114.3 Adjusting the infrared image...................................................... 5114.3.1 General...................................................................... 5114.3.2 Manual adjustment by touching the screen ........................ 5314.3.3 Manual adjustment by using the navigation pad .................. 5414.3.4 Manual adjustment in Level, Span mode ........................... 54#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US vii
Table of contents14.3.5 Manual adjustment in Level, Max, Min mode ...................... 5414.4 Changing the camera temperature range ..................................... 5514.4.1 General...................................................................... 5514.4.2 Procedure .................................................................. 5514.5 Changing the color palettes....................................................... 5514.5.1 General...................................................................... 5514.5.2 Procedure .................................................................. 5614.6 Changing the measurement parameters ...................................... 5714.7 Performing a non-uniformity correction (NUC) ............................... 5714.7.1 Performing an NUC manually.......................................... 5714.8 Hiding all overlay .................................................................... 5714.8.1 General...................................................................... 5715 Working with image modes............................................................... 5915.1 General ................................................................................ 5915.2 Image examples ..................................................................... 5915.3 Selecting an image mode ......................................................... 6016 Working with measurement tools ...................................................... 6216.1 General ................................................................................ 6216.2 Adding/removing measurement tools .......................................... 6216.3 Editing user presets................................................................. 6216.3.1 General...................................................................... 6216.3.2 Procedure .................................................................. 6216.4 Moving and resizing a measurement tool ..................................... 6316.4.1 General...................................................................... 6316.4.2 Moving a spot.............................................................. 6316.4.3 Moving and resizing a box or circle tool ............................. 6416.5 Changing the measurement parameters ...................................... 6416.5.1 General...................................................................... 6416.5.2 Types of parameters ..................................................... 6416.5.3 Recommended values................................................... 6516.5.4 Procedure .................................................................. 6516.5.5 Related topics ............................................................. 6616.6 Displaying values in the result table............................................. 6616.6.1 General...................................................................... 6616.6.2 Procedure .................................................................. 6716.7 Creating and setting up a difference calculation ............................. 6716.7.1 General...................................................................... 6716.7.2 Procedure .................................................................. 6816.8 Setting a measurement alarm .................................................... 6816.8.1 General...................................................................... 6816.8.2 Types of alarm ............................................................. 6816.8.3 Alarm signals .............................................................. 6816.8.4 Procedure .................................................................. 6817 Working with color alarms and isotherms........................................... 7117.1 Color alarms.......................................................................... 7117.1.1 General...................................................................... 7117.1.2 Image examples .......................................................... 7117.1.3 Setting up above, below, and interval alarms ...................... 7217.1.4 Building isotherms........................................................ 7318 Annotating images .......................................................................... 7518.1 General ................................................................................ 7518.2 Adding a note ........................................................................ 7518.2.1 General...................................................................... 7518.2.2 Procedure .................................................................. 75#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US viii
Table of contents18.3 Adding a text comment table ..................................................... 7518.3.1 General...................................................................... 7518.3.2 Procedure .................................................................. 7618.3.3 Creating a text comment table template ............................ 7718.4 Adding a voice annotation......................................................... 7818.4.1 General...................................................................... 7818.4.2 Procedure .................................................................. 7918.5 Adding a sketch...................................................................... 7918.5.1 General...................................................................... 7918.5.2 Procedure .................................................................. 8019 Programming the camera (time-lapse) ............................................... 8119.1 General ................................................................................ 8119.2 Procedure............................................................................. 8120 Recording video clips ...................................................................... 8220.1 General ................................................................................ 8220.2 Procedure............................................................................. 8220.3 Playing a saved video clip......................................................... 8221 Screening alarm .............................................................................. 8321.1 General ................................................................................ 8321.2 Procedure............................................................................. 8322 Pairing Bluetooth devices................................................................. 8522.1 General ................................................................................ 8522.2 Procedure............................................................................. 8523 Configuring Wi-Fi ............................................................................ 8623.1 General ................................................................................ 8623.2 Setting up a wireless access point (most common use) ................... 8623.3 Connecting the camera to a WLAN (less common use) ................... 8624 Fetching data from external FLIR meters ............................................ 8724.1 General ................................................................................ 8724.2 Technical support for external meters .......................................... 8724.3 Procedure............................................................................. 8724.4 Typical moisture measurement and documentationprocedure ............................................................................. 8824.4.1 General...................................................................... 8824.4.2 Procedure .................................................................. 8824.5 More information .................................................................... 8825 Changing settings ........................................................................... 8925.1 General ................................................................................ 8925.1.1 Connections................................................................ 8925.1.2 Camera temperature range ............................................ 8925.1.3 Save options & storage.................................................. 8925.1.4 Device settings ............................................................ 9026 Cleaning the camera ........................................................................ 9326.1 Camera housing, cables, and other items..................................... 9326.1.1 Liquids....................................................................... 9326.1.2 Equipment.................................................................. 9326.1.3 Procedure .................................................................. 9326.2 Infrared lens .......................................................................... 9326.2.1 Liquids....................................................................... 9326.2.2 Equipment.................................................................. 9326.2.3 Procedure .................................................................. 9326.3 Infrared detector ..................................................................... 9426.3.1 General...................................................................... 9426.3.2 Procedure .................................................................. 94#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US ix
Table of contents27 Technical data.................................................................................9527.1 Online field-of-view calculator .................................................... 9527.2 Note about technical data ......................................................... 9527.3 Note about authoritative versions................................................ 9527.4 FLIR T530 24°........................................................................ 9627.5 FLIR T530 42°...................................................................... 10227.6 FLIR T530 24° + 14°.............................................................. 10827.7 FLIR T530 24° + 42°.............................................................. 11427.8 FLIR T530 24° + 14° & 42°...................................................... 12027.9 FLIR T530 42° + 14°.............................................................. 12627.10 FLIR T540 24°...................................................................... 13227.11 FLIR T540 42°...................................................................... 13827.12 FLIR T540 24° + 14°.............................................................. 14427.13 FLIR T540 24° + 42°.............................................................. 15027.14 FLIR T540 24° + 14° & 42°...................................................... 15627.15 FLIR T540 42° + 14°.............................................................. 16228 Mechanical drawings ..................................................................... 16829 Application examples..................................................................... 17229.1 Moisture & water damage ....................................................... 17229.1.1 General.................................................................... 17229.1.2 Figure...................................................................... 17229.2 Faulty contact in socket .......................................................... 17229.2.1 General.................................................................... 17229.2.2 Figure...................................................................... 17229.3 Oxidized socket.................................................................... 17329.3.1 General.................................................................... 17329.3.2 Figure...................................................................... 17329.4 Insulation deficiencies............................................................ 17429.4.1 General.................................................................... 17429.4.2 Figure...................................................................... 17429.5 Draft .................................................................................. 17429.5.1 General.................................................................... 17429.5.2 Figure...................................................................... 17430 About FLIR Systems ...................................................................... 17630.1 More than just an infrared camera ............................................ 17730.2 Sharing our knowledge .......................................................... 17730.3 Supporting our customers....................................................... 17831 Terms, laws, and definitions............................................................ 17932 Thermographic measurement techniques ........................................ 18132.1 Introduction ........................................................................ 18132.2 Emissivity............................................................................ 18132.2.1 Finding the emissivity of a sample.................................. 18132.3 Reflected apparent temperature............................................... 18532.4 Distance ............................................................................. 18532.5 Relative humidity .................................................................. 18532.6 Other parameters.................................................................. 18533 The secret to a good thermal image ................................................. 18633.1 Introduction ......................................................................... 18633.2 Background......................................................................... 18633.3 A good image ...................................................................... 18633.4 The three unchangeables—the basis for a good image ................. 18733.4.1 Focus ...................................................................... 18733.4.2 Temperature range ..................................................... 18833.4.3 Image detail and distance from the object ........................ 188#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US x
Table of contents33.5 The changeables—image optimization and temperaturemeasurement....................................................................... 18933.5.1 Level and span .......................................................... 18933.5.2 Palettes and isotherms ................................................ 19033.5.3 Object parameters...................................................... 19033.6 Taking images—practical tips .................................................. 19133.7 Conclusion .......................................................................... 19134 About calibration........................................................................... 19234.1 Introduction ......................................................................... 19234.2 Definition—what is calibration? ................................................ 19234.3 Camera calibration at FLIR Systems ......................................... 19234.4 The differences between a calibration performed by a user andthat performed directly at FLIR Systems..................................... 19334.5 Calibration, verification and adjustment...................................... 19334.6 Non-uniformity correction........................................................ 19434.7 Thermal image adjustment (thermal tuning) ................................ 19435 History of infrared technology......................................................... 19536 Theory of thermography................................................................. 19836.1 Introduction ......................................................................... 19836.2 The electromagnetic spectrum................................................. 19836.3 Blackbody radiation............................................................... 19836.3.1 Planck’s law .............................................................. 19936.3.2 Wien’s displacement law.............................................. 20036.3.3 Stefan-Boltzmann's law ............................................... 20136.3.4 Non-blackbody emitters............................................... 20236.4 Infrared semi-transparent materials........................................... 20437 The measurement formula.............................................................. 20538 Emissivity tables ........................................................................... 20938.1 References.......................................................................... 20938.2 Tables ................................................................................ 209#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US xi
Disclaimers11.1 Legal disclaimerAll products manufactured by FLIR Systems are warranted against defectivematerials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the delivery dateof the original purchase, provided such products have been under normalstorage, use and service, and in accordance with FLIR Systems instruction.Uncooled handheld infrared cameras manufactured by FLIR Systems arewarranted against defective materials and workmanship for a period of two(2) years from the delivery date of the original purchase, provided such prod-ucts have been under normal storage, use and service, and in accordancewith FLIR Systems instruction, and provided that the camera has been regis-tered within 60 days of original purchase.Detectors for uncooled handheld infrared cameras manufactured by FLIRSystems are warranted against defective materials and workmanship for aperiod of ten (10) years from the delivery date of the original purchase, pro-vided such products have been under normal storage, use and service, andin accordance with FLIR Systems instruction, and provided that the camerahas been registered within 60 days of original purchase.Products which are not manufactured by FLIR Systems but included in sys-tems delivered by FLIR Systems to the original purchaser, carry the warranty,if any, of the particular supplier only. FLIR Systems has no responsibilitywhatsoever for such products.The warranty extends only to the original purchaser and is not transferable. Itis not applicable to any product which has been subjected to misuse, neglect,accident or abnormal conditions of operation. Expendable parts are excludedfrom the warranty.In the case of a defect in a product covered by this warranty the product mustnot be further used in order to prevent additional damage. The purchasershall promptly report any defect to FLIR Systems or this warranty will notapply.FLIR Systems will, at its option, repair or replace any such defective productfree of charge if, upon inspection, it proves to be defective in material or work-manship and provided that it is returned to FLIR Systems within the said one-year period.FLIR Systems has no other obligation or liability for defects than those setforth above.No other warranty is expressed or implied. FLIR Systems specifically dis-claims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particularpurpose.FLIR Systems shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental orconsequential loss or damage, whether based on contract, tort or any otherlegal theory.This warranty shall be governed by Swedish law.Any dispute, controversy or claim arising out of or in connection with this war-ranty, shall be finally settled by arbitration in accordance with the Rules of theArbitration Institute of the Stockholm Chamber of Commerce. The place of ar-bitration shall be Stockholm. The language to be used in the arbitral proceed-ings shall be English.1.2 Usage statisticsFLIR Systems reserves the right to gather anonymous usage statistics to helpmaintain and improve the quality of our software and services.1.3 Changes to registryThe registry entry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Lsa\LmCompatibilityLevel will be automatically changed to level 2 ifthe FLIR Camera Monitor service detects a FLIR camera connected to thecomputer with a USB cable. The modification will only be executed if thecamera device implements a remote network service that supports networklogons.1.4 U.S. Government RegulationsThis product may be subject to U.S. Export Regulations. Please send any in-quiries to exportquestions@flir.com.1.5 Copyright© 2016, FLIR Systems, Inc. All rights reserved worldwide. No parts of thesoftware including source code may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribedor translated into any language or computer language in any form or by anymeans, electronic, magnetic, optical, manual or otherwise, without the priorwritten permission of FLIR Systems.The documentation must not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, re-produced, translated or transmitted to any electronic medium or machinereadable form without prior consent, in writing, from FLIR Systems.Names and marks appearing on the products herein are either registeredtrademarks or trademarks of FLIR Systems and/or its subsidiaries. All othertrademarks, trade names or company names referenced herein are used foridentification only and are the property of their respective owners.1.6 Quality assuranceThe Quality Management System under which these products are developedand manufactured has been certified in accordance with the ISO 9001standard.FLIR Systems is committed to a policy of continuous development; thereforewe reserve the right to make changes and improvements on any of the prod-ucts without prior notice.1.7 Patents000439161; 000653423; 000726344; 000859020; 001707738; 001707746;001707787; 001776519; 001954074; 002021543; 002021543-0002;002058180; 002249953; 002531178; 002816785; 002816793; 011200326;014347553; 057692; 061609; 07002405; 100414275; 101796816;101796817; 101796818; 102334141; 1062100; 11063060001; 11517895;1226865; 12300216; 12300224; 1285345; 1299699; 1325808; 1336775;1391114; 1402918; 1404291; 1411581; 1415075; 1421497; 1458284;1678485; 1732314; 17399650; 1880950; 1886650; 2007301511414;2007303395047; 2008301285812; 2009301900619; 20100060357;2010301761271; 2010301761303; 2010301761572; 2010305959313;2011304423549; 2012304717443; 2012306207318; 2013302676195;2015202354035; 2015304259171; 204465713; 204967995; 2106017;2107799; 2115696; 2172004; 2315433; 2381417; 2794760001; 3006596;3006597; 303330211; 4358936; 483782; 484155; 4889913; 4937897;4995790001; 5177595; 540838; 579475; 584755; 599392; 60122153;6020040116815; 602006006500.0; 6020080347796; 6020110003453;615113; 615116; 664580; 664581; 665004; 665440; 67023029; 6707044;677298; 68657; 69036179; 70022216; 70028915; 70028923; 70057990;7034300; 710424; 7110035; 7154093; 7157705; 718801; 723605; 7237946;7312822; 7332716; 7336823; 734803; 7544944; 7606484; 7634157;7667198; 7809258; 7826736; 8018649; 8153971; 8212210; 8289372;8340414; 8354639; 8384783; 8520970; 8565547; 8595689; 8599262;8654239; 8680468; 8803093; 8823803; 8853631; 8933403; 9171361;9191583; 9279728; 9280812; 9338352; 9423940; 9471970; 9595087;D549758.1.8 EULA Terms• You have acquired a device (“INFRARED CAMERA”) that includes soft-ware licensed by FLIR Systems AB from Microsoft Licensing, GP or itsaffiliates (“MS”). Those installed software products of MS origin, as wellas associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic docu-mentation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectualproperty laws and treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. Allrights reserved.• IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT(“EULA”), DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE SOFTWARE. IN-STEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT FLIR Systems AB FOR INSTRUC-TIONS ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND.ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TOUSE ON THE DEVICE, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TOTHIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).•GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the followinglicense:◦ You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.◦NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOL-ERANT. FLIR Systems AB HAS INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINEDHOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE, AND MS HASRELIED UPON FLIR Systems AB TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENTTESTING TO DETERMINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLEFOR SUCH USE.◦NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE isprovided “AS IS” and with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TOSATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY, ANDEFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLIGENCE) IS WITH YOU.ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFERENCEWITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINSTINFRINGEMENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIESREGARDING THE DEVICE OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WAR-RANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE NOT BINDINGON, MS.◦ No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BYLAW, MS SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT,SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGESARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PER-FORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALLAPPLY EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PUR-POSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANYAMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED FIFTY DOL-LARS (U.S.$250.00).◦Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Dis-assembly. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disas-semble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent that suchactivity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstandingthis limitation.◦SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRIC-TIONS. You may permanently transfer rights under this EULA onlyas part of a permanent sale or transfer of the Device, and only ifthe recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,any transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.◦EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE issubject to U.S. export jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all ap-plicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFT-WARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, aswell as end-user, end-use and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional information see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.1.9 EULA TermsQt4 Core and Qt4 GUI, Copyright ©2013 Nokia Corporation and FLIR Sys-tems AB. This Qt library is a free software; you can redistribute it and/or mod-ify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as publishedby the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at youroption) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will beuseful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty ofMERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See theGNU Lesser General Public License, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl-2.1.html. The source code for the libraries Qt4 Core and Qt4 GUI may be re-quested from FLIR Systems AB.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 1
Safety information2WARNINGApplicability: Class B digital devices.This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pur-suant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection againstharmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmfulinterference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur ina particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television recep-tion, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-rect the interference by one or more of the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver isconnected.• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.WARNINGApplicability: Digital devices subject to 15.19/RSS-210.NOTICE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.Operation is subject to the following two conditions:1. this device may not cause harmful interference, and2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.WARNINGApplicability: Digital devices subject to 15.21.NOTICE: Changes or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by FLIR Systemsmay void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.WARNINGApplicability: Digital devices subject to 2.1091/2.1093/OET Bulletin 65.Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information: The radiated output power of the device is belowthe FCC/IC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the device shall be used in such a mannerthat the potential for human contact during normal operation is minimized.WARNINGDo not look directly into the laser beam. The laser beam can cause eye irritation.WARNINGDo not point the camera at the face of a person when the continuous autofocus function is on. The cam-era uses laser distance measurements (that are continuous) for the focus adjustments. The laser beamcan cause eye irritation.WARNINGDo not point the camera at the face of a person when you use the autofocus function. You can set thecamera to use a laser distance measurement for the focus adjustment. The laser beam can cause eyeirritation.WARNINGApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not disassemble or do a modification to the battery. The battery contains safety and protection devi-ces which, if damage occurs, can cause the battery to become hot, or cause an explosion or an ignition.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 2
Safety information2WARNINGApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.If there is a leak from the battery and you get the fluid in your eyes, do not rub your eyes. Flush well withwater and immediately get medical care. The battery fluid can cause injury to your eyes if you do not dothis.WARNINGApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not continue to charge the battery if it does not become charged in the specified charging time. Ifyou continue to charge the battery, it can become hot and cause an explosion or ignition. Injury to per-sons can occur.WARNINGApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Only use the correct equipment to remove the electrical power from the battery. If you do not use thecorrect equipment, you can decrease the performance or the life cycle of the battery. If you do not usethe correct equipment, an incorrect flow of current to the battery can occur. This can cause the batteryto become hot, or cause an explosion. Injury to persons can occur.WARNINGMake sure that you read all applicable MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) and warning labels on con-tainers before you use a liquid. The liquids can be dangerous. Injury to persons can occur.CAUTIONDo not point the infrared camera (with or without the lens cover) at strong energy sources, for example,devices that cause laser radiation, or the sun. This can have an unwanted effect on the accuracy of thecamera. It can also cause damage to the detector in the camera.CAUTIONDo not use the camera in temperatures more than +50°C (+122°F), unless other information is specifiedin the user documentation or technical data. High temperatures can cause damage to the camera.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not attach the batteries directly to a car’s cigarette lighter socket, unless FLIR Systems supplies aspecific adapter to connect the batteries to a cigarette lighter socket. Damage to the batteries canoccur.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not connect the positive terminal and the negative terminal of the battery to each other with a metalobject (such as wire). Damage to the batteries can occur.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not get water or salt water on the battery, or permit the battery to become wet. Damage to the bat-teries can occur.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not make holes in the battery with objects. Damage to the battery can occur.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 3
Safety information2CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not hit the battery with a hammer. Damage to the battery can occur.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not put your foot on the battery, hit it or cause shocks to it. Damage to the battery can occur.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not put the batteries in or near a fire, or into direct sunlight. When the battery becomes hot, the built-in safety equipment becomes energized and can stop the battery charging procedure. If the battery be-comes hot, damage can occur to the safety equipment and this can cause more heat, damage or igni-tion of the battery.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not put the battery on a fire or increase the temperature of the battery with heat. Damage to the bat-tery and injury to persons can occur.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not put the battery on or near fires, stoves, or other high-temperature locations. Damage to the bat-tery and injury to persons can occur.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not solder directly onto the battery. Damage to the battery can occur.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Do not use the battery if, when you use, charge, or put the battery in storage, there is an unusual smellfrom the battery, the battery feels hot, changes color, changes shape, or is in an unusual condition.Speak with your sales office if one or more of these problems occurs. Damage to the battery and injuryto persons can occur.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Only use a specified battery charger when you charge the battery. Damage to the battery can occur ifyou do not do this.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Only use a specified battery for the camera. Damage to the camera and the battery can occur if you donot do this.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.The temperature range through which you can charge the battery is ±0°C to +45°C (+32°F to +113°F),except for the Korean market where the approved range is +10°C to + 45°C (+50°F to +113°F). If youcharge the battery at temperatures out of this range, it can cause the battery to become hot or to break.It can also decrease the performance or the life cycle of the battery.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 4
Safety information2CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.The temperature range through which you can remove the electrical power from the battery is -15°C to+50°C (+5°F to +122°F), unless other information is specified in the user documentation or technicaldata. If you operate the battery out of this temperature range, it can decrease the performance or the lifecycle of the battery.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.When the battery is worn, apply insulation to the terminals with adhesive tape or equivalent materialsbefore you discard it. Damage to the battery and injury to persons can occur if you do not do this.CAUTIONApplicability: Cameras with one or more batteries.Remove any water or moisture on the battery before you install it. Damage to the battery can occur ifyou do not do this.CAUTIONDo not apply solvents or equivalent liquids to the camera, the cables, or other items. Damage to the bat-tery and injury to persons can occur.CAUTIONBe careful when you clean the infrared lens. The lens has an anti-reflective coating which is easily dam-aged. Damage to the infrared lens can occur.CAUTIONDo not use too much force to clean the infrared lens. This can cause damage to the anti-reflectivecoating.Note The encapsulation rating is only applicable when all the openings on the cameraare sealed with their correct covers, hatches, or caps. This includes the compartmentsfor data storage, batteries, and connectors.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 5
Notice to user33.1 User-to-user forumsExchange ideas, problems, and infrared solutions with fellow thermographers around theworld in our user-to-user forums. To go to the forums, visit:http://forum.infraredtraining.com/3.2 CalibrationWe recommend that you send in the camera for calibration once a year. Contact your lo-cal sales office for instructions on where to send the camera.3.3 AccuracyFor very accurate results, we recommend that you wait 5 minutes after you have startedthe camera before measuring a temperature.3.4 Disposal of electronic wasteAs with most electronic products, this equipment must be disposed of in an environmen-tally friendly way, and in accordance with existing regulations for electronic waste.Please contact your FLIR Systems representative for more details.3.5 TrainingTo read about infrared training, visit:• http://www.infraredtraining.com• http://www.irtraining.com• http://www.irtraining.eu3.6 Documentation updatesOur manuals are updated several times per year, and we also issue product-critical notifi-cations of changes on a regular basis.To access the latest manuals, translations of manuals, and notifications, go to the Down-load tab at:http://support.flir.comIt only takes a few minutes to register online. In the download area you will also find thelatest releases of manuals for our other products, as well as manuals for our historicaland obsolete products.3.7 Important note about this manualFLIR Systems issues generic manuals that cover several cameras within a model line.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 6
Notice to user3This means that this manual may contain descriptions and explanations that do not applyto your particular camera model.3.8 Note about authoritative versionsThe authoritative version of this publication is English. In the event of divergences due totranslation errors, the English text has precedence.Any late changes are first implemented in English.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 7
Customer help44.1 GeneralFor customer help, visit:http://support.flir.com4.2 Submitting a questionTo submit a question to the customer help team, you must be a registered user. It onlytakes a few minutes to register online. If you only want to search the knowledgebase forexisting questions and answers, you do not need to be a registered user.When you want to submit a question, make sure that you have the following informationto hand:• The camera model• The camera serial number• The communication protocol, or method, between the camera and your device (for ex-ample, SD card reader, HDMI, Ethernet, USB, or FireWire)• Device type (PC/Mac/iPhone/iPad/Android device, etc.)• Version of any programs from FLIR Systems#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 8
Customer help4• Full name, publication number, and revision number of the manual4.3 DownloadsOn the customer help site you can also download the following, when applicable for theproduct:• Firmware updates for your infrared camera.• Program updates for your PC/Mac software.• Freeware and evaluation versions of PC/Mac software.• User documentation for current, obsolete, and historical products.• Mechanical drawings (in *.dxf and *.pdf format).• Cad data models (in *.stp format).• Application stories.• Technical datasheets.• Product catalogs.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 9
Quick start guide55.1 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Before starting the camera for the first time, charge the battery for 3 hours using thestand-alone battery charger.2. Put the battery into the camera battery compartment.3. Insert a memory card into the card slot.Note Empty or use a memory card that has not previously been used in anothertype of camera. The cameras may organize files differently on the memory card.There is therefore a risk of losing data if the same memory card is used in differenttypes of cameras.4. Push the on/off button to turn on the camera.5. Aim the camera toward the object of interest.6. Adjust the infrared camera focus.Note It is very important to adjust the focus correctly. Incorrect focus adjustment af-fects how the image modes work. It also affects the temperature measurement.7. Push the Save button to save an image.8. Download and install FLIR Tools/Tools+ or FLIR Report Studio on your computer.19. Start FLIR Tools/Tools+ or FLIR Report Studio.10. Connect the camera to the computer using the USB cable.11. Import the images into FLIR Tools/Tools+ or FLIR Report Studio and create an in-spection report.12. Send the inspection report to your client.5.2 To keep in mind• Adjust the focus first. When the camera is out of focus, the measurement will bewrong.• By default, most cameras adapt the scale automatically. Use this mode first, but donot hesitate to set the scale manually.• A thermal camera has a resolution limit. This depends on the size of the detector, thelens, and the distance to the target. Use the center of the spot tool as a guide to theminimum possible object size, and get closer if necessary. Make sure to stay awayfrom dangerous areas and live electrical components.• Be careful when holding the camera perpendicular to the target. Be observant of re-flections, especially at low emissivities—you, the camera, or the surroundings may be-come the main source of reflection.• Select a zone of high emissivity, e.g., an area with a matte surface, to perform ameasurement.• Blank objects, i.e., those with low emissivities, may appear warm or cold in the cam-era, because they mainly reflect the environment.• Avoid direct sunlight on the details that you are inspecting.• Various types of faults, e.g., those in a building’s construction, may result in the sametype of thermal pattern.• Correctly analyzing an infrared image requires professional knowledge about theapplication.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 101. FLIR Tools+ and FLIR Report studio are licensed software.
Register the camera66.1 GeneralRegister your camera to receive an extended warranty and other related benefits.To register the camera, you must log in using a FLIR Customer Support account. If youalready have an existing FLIR Customer Support account, you can use the same logincredentials. To complete the registration, you must enter a four-digit verification code intothe camera.6.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Use a computer or other device with internet access and go to the following website:http://support.flir.com/camregThis displays the following dialog:2. To log in with your existing FLIR Customer Support account, do the following:2.1. Enter your Username and Password.2.2. Click Log In.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 11
Register the camera63. To create a new FLIR Customer Support account, do the following:3.1. Click Create a New Account.3.2. Enter the required information and click Create Account.4. On the camera, select (Settings)Device settings >Camera information >Regis-ter camera. This displays the following dialog box:Note The first time you start the camera, the registration dialog box is displayed asa part of the setup of regional settings.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 12
Register the camera65. Select Register and push the navigation pad. This displays a dialog box with the seri-al number of the camera.6. On the computer, enter the serial number of the camera and click Validate.7. When the serial number is validated, click Continue.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 13
Register the camera68. Enter the required information and click Register Product.9. When the registration is completed, the four-digit code is displayed.Note• The code is also sent by e-mail to the address registered with your FLIR CustomerSupport account.• The code is also displayed in your FLIR Customer Support portal under My Stuff >Products.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 14
Register the camera610. On the camera, do the following to enter the code:• Push the navigation pad up/down to select a digit.• Push the navigation pad left/right to navigate to the previous/next digit.• When all digits have been entered, push the navigation pad right to select Submit.Push the navigation pad to confirm.11. The camera is now registered and your extended warranty is activated.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 15
A note about ergonomics77.1 GeneralTo prevent strain-related injuries, it is important that you hold the camera ergonomicallycorrectly. This section gives advice and examples on how to hold the camera.Note• Always tilt the LCD screen to suit your work position.• When you hold the camera, make sure that you support the optics housing with yourleft hand too. This decreases the strain on your right hand.7.2 Figure#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 16
Camera parts88.1 View from the rear8.1.1 Figure8.1.2 Explanation1. Focus ring.2. Speaker.3. Programmable button.4. Image archive button.5. Navigation pad with center push.6. Back button.7. On/off button.8. Hand strap.9. Multi-touch LCD screen.10. Light sensor.11. Microphone.12. Attachment point for the neck strap.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 17
Camera parts88.2 View from the front8.2.1 Figure8.2.2 Explanation1. Autofocus button.2. Save button.3. Attachment point for the neck strap.4. Laser receiver.5. Laser transmitter.6. Camera lamp (left and right sides).7. Infrared lens.8. Digital camera.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 18
Camera parts88.3 View from the bottom8.3.1 Figure8.3.2 Explanation1. Laser button.2. Programmable button.3. Tripod mount.4. Cover for the connector compartment.5. Battery.8.4 Laser distance meter and laser pointer8.4.1 GeneralThe laser distance meter consists of a laser transmitter and a laser receiver. The laserdistance meter determines the distance to a target by measuring the time it takes for a la-ser pulse to reach the target and return to the laser receiver. This time is converted to adistance, which is displayed on the screen.The laser receiver also works as a laser pointer. When the laser distance meter is on,you will see a laser dot approximately at the target.WARNINGDo not look directly into the laser beam. The laser beam can cause eye irritation.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 19
Camera parts8Note• The laser is enabled by a setting. Select (Settings) > Device settings >Lamp & la-ser >Enable lamp & laser.• The symbol is displayed on the screen when the laser is on.• The camera can be configured to automatically measure the distance when an imageis saved. Select (Settings) > Save options & storage >Measure distance. Withthis setting, the Object distance parameter (see section 16.5 Changing the measure-ment parameters, page 64) in the image data is automatically updated with the meas-ured distance when an image is saved. (There is no effect on the Object distancesetting in live mode.)• If the target reflection is low or if the target is angled from the laser beam, there maybe no return signal, and the distance cannot be measured.• The laser distance meter may not be enabled in all markets.8.4.2 Laser transmitter and receiver1. Laser receiver.2. Laser transmitter.8.4.3 Difference in positionThis figure shows the difference in position between the laser transmitter and the opticalcenter of the infrared lens. The laser transmitter and the optical axis are parallel.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 20
Camera parts88.4.4 Laser warning labelA laser warning label with the following information is attached to the camera:8.4.5 Laser rules and regulationsWavelength: 650 nm. Maximum output power: 1 mW.This product complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 except for deviations pursuantto Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 21
Screen elements99.1 General1. Result table.2. Status icons.3. Measurement tool (e.g., spotmeter).4. Temperature scale.5. Menu system button.9.2 Menu systemTo display the menu system, push the navigation pad or tap the menu system button.1. Recording mode button.2. Measurement parameters button.3. Image mode button.4. Measurement button.5. Color button.6. Settings button.7. Main menu.8. Submenu.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 22
Screen elements99.3 Soft buttons1. Work folder button: Touch to open a menu where you can create new folders andchange the active folder.2. Lamp button: Touch to turn on/off the camera lamp.3. Continuous autofocus button: Touch to enable/disable continuous autofocus.4. Overlay button: Touch to show/hide all overlay graphics and image overlayinformation.5. Temperature scale button: Touch to switch between the automatic and manual imageadjustment modes.Note• Before you can turn on the camera lamp, you need to enable the lamp. Select(Settings) > Device settings >Lamp & laser >Enable lamp & laser or Enable lamp &laser + Use lamp as flash.• Before you can enable continuous autofocus, you need to enable the laser. Select(Settings) > Device settings >Lamp & laser >Enable lamp & laser or Enable lamp& laser + Use lamp as flash.9.4 Status icons and indicatorsBattery status indicator.• When the battery status is 20–100%, the indi-cator is white.• When the battery is charging, the indicator isgreen.• When the battery status is below 20%, the in-dicator is red.The remaining storage capacity is below 100 MB.A Bluetooth headset is connected.External infrared window compensation isenabled.The laser is on.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 23
Screen elements99.5 Swipe-down menuTo open the swipe-down menu, place your finger at the top of the screen and swipedown.1. Battery status indicator.2. Memory card storage status indicator.3. •Wi-Fi button: Touch to enable/disable Wi-Fi. See also section 23 Configuring Wi-Fi, page 86.•Bluetooth button: Touch to enable/disable Bluetooth. See also section 22 PairingBluetooth devices, page 85.•Screen rotation button: Touch to enable/disable screen rotation.4. Screen brightness slider: Used to control the brightness of the screen.9.6 Image overlay informationThe image information consists of items such as the date, emissivity, and atmospherictemperature. All image information is saved in the image file and can be viewed in the im-age archive. You can also choose to display selected items as image overlay information.All image overlay information displayed on the live image will also be displayed on savedimages. For more information, see sections section 25.1.4 Device settings, page 90 and14.8 Hiding all overlay, page 57.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 24
Navigating the menu system1010.1 GeneralThe figure above shows the two ways to navigate the menu system in the camera:• Using your finger or a stylus pen specially designed for capacitive touch usage to nav-igate the menu system (left).• Using the navigation pad to navigate the menu system (right) and the back button.You can also use a combination of the two.In this manual, it is assumed that the navigation pad is used, but most tasks can also becarried out using your finger or a stylus pen.10.2 Navigating using the navigation padYou navigate the menu system by using the navigation pad and the back button:• To display the menu system, push the center of the navigation pad.• To navigate in menus, submenus, and dialog boxes, and to change values in dialogboxes, push the navigation pad up/down or left/right.• To confirm changes and settings in menus and dialog boxes, push the center of thenavigation pad.• To leave dialog boxes and to go back in the menu system, push the back button .#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 25
Handling the camera1111.1 Charging the battery11.1.1 General• Before starting the camera for the first time, charge the battery for 3 hours using thestand-alone battery charger.• Select a mains socket that is near the equipment and easily accessible.11.1.2 Using the stand-alone battery charger to charge the battery11.1.2.1 Stand-alone battery charger LED indicatorType of signal ExplanationThe white LED flashes. The battery is being charged.The white LED glows continuously. The battery is fully charged.11.1.2.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Put one or two batteries in the battery charger.2. Connect the power supply cable plug to the connector on the battery charger.3. Connect the power supply mains-electricity plug to a mains socket.4. When the white LED on the battery charger glows continuously, the batteries are fullycharged.5. It is good practice to disconnect the stand-alone battery charger from the mainssocket when the batteries are fully charged.11.1.3 Using the USB battery charger to charge the battery when it is inside thecameraFollow this procedure:1. Put the battery into the battery compartment of the camera.2. Connect the USB battery charger to a mains socket.3. Open the cover for the connector compartment at the bottom of the camera.4. Connect the USB connector of the USB battery charger to the USB-C connector inthe connector bay of the camera.5. To check the status of the battery charging, do one of the following:• If the camera is turned on: Place your finger at the top of the screen and swipedown. The battery status is displayed on the swipe-down menu.• If the camera is turned off: The battery charging indicator is temporarily displayedon the screen.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 26
Handling the camera116. It is good practice to disconnect the USB battery charger from the mains socket whenthe battery is fully charged.Note When closing the cover for the connector compartment, firmly press along theedges of the cover to make sure that it closes tightly.11.1.4 Charging the battery using a USB cable connected to a computerFollow this procedure:1. Open the cover for the connector compartment at the bottom of the camera.2. Connect a USB cable to the USB-C connector in the connector bay. Connect the oth-er end of the USB cable to the computer.Note• To charge the camera, the computer must be turned on.• Charging the camera using a USB cable connected to a computer takes considerablylonger than using the USB battery charger or the stand-alone battery charger. If thecamera is on, it may use more power than the computer provides.• When closing the cover for the connector compartment, firmly press along the edgesof the cover to make sure that it closes tightly.11.2 Installing and removing the camerabattery11.2.1 Installing the batteryNote Use a clean, dry cloth to remove any water or moisture on the battery before youinstall it.11.2.1.1 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the battery into the battery compartment. The battery makes a click when itlocks in place.11.2.2 Removing the batteryNote Use a clean, dry cloth to remove any water or moisture on the camera before youremove the battery.Follow this procedure:1. Turn off the camera.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 27
Handling the camera112. Push the two release buttons and remove the battery from the camera.11.3 Turning on and turning off the camera• To turn on the camera, push the on/off button .• To turn off the camera, push and hold the on/off button for more than 0.5 second.Note Do not remove the battery to turn off the camera.11.4 Adjusting the angle of lens11.4.1 Figure#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 28
Handling the camera1111.4.2 ProcedureTo adjust the angle, tilt the lens up or down.11.5 Adjusting the infrared camera focusmanually11.5.1 Figure11.5.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Do one of the following:• For far focus, rotate the focus ring clockwise (with the LCD screen facing towardyou).• For near focus, rotate the focus ring counter-clockwise (with the LCD screen fac-ing toward you).Note Do not touch the lens surface when you adjust the infrared camera focus man-ually. If this happens, clean the lens according to the instructions in 26.2 Infrared lens,page 93.Note It is very important to adjust the focus correctly. Incorrect focus adjustment affectshow the image modes Thermal MSX,Thermal, and Picture-in-picture work. It also affectsthe temperature measurement.11.6 Autofocusing the infrared camera11.6.1 GeneralWhen autofocusing, the infrared camera can use one of the following focus methods:•Contrast: The focus is based on maximizing the image contrast.•Laser: The focus is based on a laser distance measurement. The laser is used whenthe camera is autofocusing.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 29
Handling the camera11The focus method is configured by a setting. Select (Settings) > Device settings >Focus >Auto focus and then select Contrast or Laser.11.6.2 Figure11.6.3 ProcedureWARNINGWhen the camera is set to autofocusing with the laser method (Settings >Device settings >Focus >Au-to focus >Laser), do not point the camera at the face of a person when you use the autofocus function.The laser beam can cause eye irritation.Follow this procedure:1. To autofocus the infrared camera, push the Autofocus button.Note You can also assign the autofocus function to one of the programmable buttons. For more information, see section 11.12 Assigning functions to the programmablebuttons, page 34.11.7 Continuous autofocus11.7.1 GeneralThe infrared camera can be set up to perform continuous autofocusing.When the continuous autofocus function is enabled, the camera bases the focus adjust-ments on continuous laser distance measurements. The laser is continuously on.WARNINGDo not point the camera at the face of a person when the continuous autofocus function is on. The cam-era uses laser distance measurements (that are continuous) for the focus adjustments. The laser beamcan cause eye irritation.Note• Before you can enable continuous autofocus, you need to enable the laser and selectlaser as focus method. See section 11.7.2 Procedure, page 31.• When continuous autofocus is enabled, it is not possible to manually adjust the focusby rotating the focus ring.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 30
Handling the camera1111.7.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Settings) and push the navigation pad. This displays the Settings menu.3. Use the navigation pad to select Device settings >Lamp & laser >Enable lamp &laser.4. Use the navigation pad to select Device settings >Focus >Autofocus >Laser.5. Do one of the following:• Use the navigation pad to select Device settings >Focus >Continuous autofocus>On.• Touch the soft button .Note You can also assign the continuous autofocus function to one of the program-mable buttons . For more information, see section 11.12 Assigning functions to theprogrammable buttons, page 34.11.8 Operating the laser distance meter11.8.1 GeneralThe laser distance meter consists of a laser transmitter and a laser receiver. The laserdistance meter determines the distance to a target by measuring the time it takes for a la-ser pulse to reach the target and return to the laser receiver. This time is converted to adistance, which is displayed on the screen.The laser receiver also works as a laser pointer. When the laser distance meter is on,you will see a laser dot approximately at the target.WARNINGDo not look directly into the laser beam. The laser beam can cause eye irritation.Note• The laser is enabled by a setting. Select (Settings) > Device settings >Lamp & la-ser >Enable lamp & laser.• The symbol is displayed on the screen when the laser is on.• The camera can be configured to automatically measure the distance when an imageis saved. Select (Settings) > Save options & storage >Measure distance. Withthis setting, the Object distance parameter (see section 16.5 Changing the measure-ment parameters, page 64) in the image data is automatically updated with the meas-ured distance when an image is saved. (There is no effect on the Object distancesetting in live mode.)• If the target reflection is low or if the target is angled from the laser beam, there maybe no return signal, and the distance cannot be measured.• The laser distance meter may not be enabled in all markets.11.8.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. To turn on the laser, push and hold the laser button . The distance to the target isdisplayed on the screen.2. To turn off the laser, release the laser button .#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 31
Handling the camera1111.9 Measuring areas11.9.1 GeneralThe distance measured by the laser distance meter can be used as the basis for areacalculations. A typical application is to estimate the size of a damp stain on a wall.To measure the area of a surface, you need to lay out a box or circle measurement toolon the screen. The camera calculates the area of the surface enclosed by the box orcircle tool. The calculation is an estimate of the surface area, based on the measureddistance to the target.When the laser distance meter is on, you will see a laser dot approximately at the target.The laser distance meter measures the distance to that target. The camera assumes thatthis distance is valid for the entire box or circle tool.For successful area measurements, keep the following in mind:• Make sure that the box or circle tool is in the center of the image.• Adjust the size of the box or circle tool to the size of the target.• Hold the camera perpendicular to the target.• Avoid targets with many details at different distances from the camera.11.9.2 ProcedureNote This procedure assumes that you have enabled the laser. Select (Settings) >Device settings >Lamp & laser >Enable lamp & laser.Follow this procedure:1. Add a box or circle measurement tool, see section 16.2 Adding/removing measure-ment tools, page 62.2. Set the camera to measure and display the area of the box or circle, see section 16.6Displaying values in the result table, page 66.3. Make sure that the box or circle tool is in the center of the image, see section 16.4Moving and resizing a measurement tool, page 63.4. Adjust the size of the box or circle tool to the size of the target, see section 16.4 Mov-ing and resizing a measurement tool, page 63.5. Hold the camera perpendicular to the target. Push and hold the laser button .6. The calculated area is displayed in the result table.11.10 Connecting external devices and storagemedia11.10.1 GeneralYou can connect the following external devices and media to the camera:• An SD memory card.• A computer to move image and video files to and from the camera, using a USB-C toUSB-A or a USB-C to USB-C cable.• A video monitor or projector, using a USB-C to HDMI adapter.• A USB battery charger.Note Empty or use a memory card that has not previously been used in another type ofcamera. The cameras may organize files differently on the memory card. There is there-fore a risk of losing data if the same memory card is used in different types of cameras.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 32
Handling the camera1111.10.2 Figure11.10.3 Explanation1. USB-C cable.2. SD memory card.3. LED indicator showing that the memory card is busy.Note• Do not eject the memory card when this LED is flashing.• Do not connect the camera to a computer when this LED is flashing.Note When closing the cover for the connector compartment, firmly press along theedges of the cover to make sure that it closes tightly.11.11 Moving files to a computer11.11.1 GeneralWhen you save an image or video clip in the image archive of the camera, the file isstored on the memory card.You can connect the camera to a computer, using a USB-C to USB-A or a USB-C toUSB-C cable. Once connected, you can move the image and video files from the memo-ry card to the computer.11.11.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Open the cover for the connector compartment at the bottom of the camera.2. Connect a USB cable to the USB-C connector in the connector bay. Connect the oth-er end of the USB cable to the computer.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 33
Handling the camera113. Turn on the camera.4. Do one of the following:• Move the files to the computer using a drag-and-drop operation in Microsoft Win-dows Explorer.Note Moving a file using a drag-and-drop operation does not delete the file inthe camera.• Import the images into FLIR Tools/Tools+ or FLIR Report Studio.Note When closing the cover for the connector compartment, firmly press along theedges of the cover to make sure that it closes tightly.11.12 Assigning functions to theprogrammable buttons11.12.1 GeneralThere are two individually programmable buttons: one above the screen and one at thebottom of the optics housing.You can assign different functions to the programmable buttons. You can, for example,use a programmable button to easily switch between two settings you use often. You canalso choose to define two different setups for saving and previewing: the usual setup forthe Save button (which is defined by the Save options and storage settings, see section25.1.3 Save options & storage, page 89) and another setup for a programmable button.Available options for the programmable buttons:•No action: This is the default setting. Nothing will happen when you push the button.•Switch Auto <> Manual temperature scale: Switch between automatic or manual im-age adjustment mode. For more information, see section 14.3 Adjusting the infraredimage, page 51.•Autofocus: One-shot autofocus of the infrared camera.•Continuous autofocus: Switch between the enabled/disabled continuous autofocusfunctions.•Calibrate: Perform a manual NUC. For more information, see section 14.7 Performinga non-uniformity correction (NUC), page 57.•Auto-adjust the manual temperature scale: Perform an automatic adjustment of theimage while remaining in manual image adjustment mode.•Switch Thermal <> Digital camera: Switch between the image modes Thermal andDigital camera. For more information, see section 15 Working with image modes,page 59.•Switch Thermal <> Thermal MSX: Switch between the image modes Thermal andThermal MSX. For more information, see section 15 Working with image modes, page59.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 34
Handling the camera11•Switch 1x zoom <> Max zoom: Switch between the digital zoom factor of 1× and max-imum zoom.•Switch camera flash On <> Off: Switch between the enabled/disabled camera flashfunctions. For more information, see section 11.13 Using the camera lamp as a flash,page 35.Note The flash function will not be activated if the setting Lamp & laser is set to theoption Disable all. For more information, see section 25.1.4 Device settings, page 90.•Switch single shot <> Video: Switch between the recording modes Single shot andVideo.•Switch between two latest palettes: Switch between the two last-used color palettes.For more information, see section 14.5 Changing the color palettes, page 55.•Switch temperature range: Cycle through the camera temperature ranges. For moreinformation, see section 25.1.2 Camera temperature range, page 89.•Switch screen rotation On <> Off: Switch between enabled/disabled screen rotation.•Save: Save an image.•Save + Prompt for note: Save an image and display the note annotation tool.•Save + Prompt for table: Save an image and display the table annotation tool.•Save + Prompt for voice annotation: Save an image and display the voice annotationtool.•Save + Prompt for sketch: Save an image and display the sketch annotation tool.•Save + Select annotation from menu: Save an image and display the annotation toolmenu.•Preview: Display a preview image.•Preview + Prompt for note: Display a preview image and the note annotation tool.•Preview + Prompt for table: Display a preview image and the table annotation tool.•Preview + Prompt for voice annotation: Display a preview image and the voice annota-tion tool.•Preview + Prompt for sketch: Display a preview image and the sketch annotation tool.•Preview + Select annotation from menu: Display a preview image and the annotationtool menu.11.12.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push and hold the programmable button . This displays the Programmable buttonmenu.2. Push the navigation pad up/down to select one of the functions. Push the center ofthe navigation pad to confirm.11.13 Using the camera lamp as a flash11.13.1 GeneralThe camera lamp can be used as a flash for the digital camera. When the flash functionis enabled, the camera lamp will flash when an image is saved by pushing the Savebutton.You can also turn on the camera lamp to use it as a flashlight.11.13.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Settings) and push the navigation pad. This displays the Settings menu.3. Use the navigation pad to select Device settings >Lamp & laser.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 35
Handling the camera114. Do one of the following:• To enable the camera lamp function, select Enable lamp & laser and push the nav-igation pad. To turn on/off the camera lamp, touch the soft button .• To enable the flash function, select Enable lamp & laser + Use lamp as flash andpush the navigation pad.• To disable the camera lamp and flash functions, select Disable all and push thenavigation pad.Note You can also assign the function Switch camera flash On <> Off to one of the pro-grammable buttons . For more information, see section 11.12 Assigning functions tothe programmable buttons, page 34.11.14 Changing camera lensesNote Do not touch the lens surface when you change lenses. If this happens, clean thelens according to the instructions in 26.2 Infrared lens, page 93.Follow this procedure:1. Take a firm grip around the inner ring of the lens. Rotate the inner ring 30° counter-clockwise until it stops.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 36
Handling the camera112. Carefully pull out the lens.3. The infrared detector is now fully exposed. Do not touch this surface. If you see duston the detector, follow the instructions in 26.3 Infrared detector, page 94.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 37
Handling the camera114. Make sure that the inner ring of the camera lens is fully in its open position.• Correct: The tooth (1) is in its end position at the black stop pin (2).• Wrong: You must rotate the inner ring until the tooth (1) reaches the black stop pin(2).5. Carefully push the lens into position.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 38
Handling the camera116. Rotate the inner ring of the lens 30° clockwise. The lens makes a click when it locksin place.7. Make sure that the two index marks are aligned, indicating that the lens is locked inplace.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 39
Handling the camera1111.15 Neck strapTo attach the neck strap to the camera, use the two attachment points indicated in thefigure.11.16 Hand strapTo replace the hand strap, follow this procedure:1. Remove the battery.2. Open the hook-and-loop fastener and remove the hand strap from the upper attach-ment point.3. Remove the two T6 screws.4. Remove the hand strap from the bracket at the base of the camera.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 40
Handling the camera115. Put the new hand strap into the bracket at the base of the camera.6. Push the bracket into the camera. Make sure that the two holes in the hand strap arealigned with the holes in the bracket.7. Tighten the two T6 screws.8. Thread the loose strap through the upper attachment point. Secure the strap with thehook-and-loop fastener.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 41
Saving and working with images1212.1 About image files12.1.1 GeneralWhen you save an image, the camera saves an image file that includes all thermal andvisual information. This means that you can open an image file at a later time and, for ex-ample, select another image mode, apply color alarms, and add measurement tools.The image *.jpg file is fully radiometric and saved lossless, which enables full post-proc-essing in image analysis and reporting software from FLIR Systems. There is also a reg-ular *.jpg component (lossy) for convenient viewing in non-FLIR Systems software (e.g.,Microsoft Explorer).Note• The camera can also be configured to save an extra low-resolution visual image as aseparate file. This can be convenient if you are not using a post-processing software.Select (Settings) > Save options & storage >Photo as separate JPEG =On.• When the Digital camera image mode is selected, a high-resolution digital image isstored when an image is saved. However, no thermal information is stored. For moreinformation, see section 15 Working with image modes, page 59.12.1.2 File-naming conventionThe default naming convention for image files is FLIRxxxx.jpg, where xxxx is a uniquecounter.It is also possible to save images with a date prefix added to the filename. However,these files may not automatically be detected by third-party applications. For more infor-mation, see the setting File naming format in section 25.1.3 Save options & storage,page 89.12.1.3 Storage capacityWhen you save an image, the camera stores the image file on the memory card.The size of an image file (with no annotations) is typically less than 1000 kB. Thus, thecapacity of a 8 GB memory card is approximately 8000 images.Note Empty or use a memory card that has not previously been used in another type ofcamera. The cameras may organize files differently on the memory card. There is there-fore a risk of losing data if the same memory card is used in different types of cameras.12.1.4 About UltraMaxUltraMax is an image enhancement feature that increases the image resolution and low-ers the noise, making small objects easier to see and measure. An UltraMax image istwice as wide and high as an ordinary image.When an UltraMax image is captured by the camera, several ordinary images are savedwithin the same file. Capturing all the images can take up to 1 second. To fully utilize Ul-traMax, the images need to be slightly different, which can be accomplished by a minutemovement of the camera. You should hold the camera firmly in your hands (do not put iton a tripod), which will make these images vary just a little during the capture. Correct fo-cus, a high-contrast scene, and a non-moving target are other conditions that help toachieve a good-quality UltraMax image.FLIR Tools/Tools+ and FLIR ResearchIR Max have the ability to process UltraMax im-ages. Other FLIR software will treat the image as a regular image.To configure the camera for UltraMax, select (Settings) > Save options & storage >Image resolution =UltraMax.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 42
Saving and working with images1212.2 Saving an image12.2.1 GeneralYou can save images to the memory card.12.2.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. To save an image, push the Save button.Note Depending on the settings in (Settings) > Save options & storage, the follow-ing may happen:• A preview image is displayed before the image is saved.• An annotation tool or the annotation menu is displayed when the image has beensaved.12.3 Previewing an image12.3.1 GeneralYou can preview an image before you save it. This enables you to see if the image con-tains the information you want before you save it. You can also adjust and edit the image.Note The camera must be configured to display a preview image before saving. Select(Settings) > Save options & storage >Preview image before saving =On.12.3.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. To preview an image, push the Save button. This displays the preview.2. Manual image adjustment mode is now active. For image adjustment instructions,see section 14.3 Adjusting the infrared image, page 51.3. To edit the image, push the navigation pad. This displays a context menu. For editinginstructions, see section 12.5 Editing a saved image, page 44.4. Do one of the following:• To save the image, push the Save button.• To exit preview mode without saving, push the back button .#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 43
Saving and working with images1212.4 Opening a saved image12.4.1 GeneralWhen you save an image, the image file is stored on the memory card. To display the im-age again, open it from the image archive (Gallery).12.4.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery with one or morefolders.2. Select a folder and push the navigation pad.3. Select the image you want to view and push the navigation pad.4. Do one or more of the following:• To view the previous/next image, push the navigation pad left/right.• To display a toolbar at the top of the screen, push the navigation pad. Do one ormore of the following:◦ To switch between an infrared image and a visual image, select the iconand push the navigation pad.◦ To edit the image, delete the image, display information, or add annotations, se-lect the icon and push the navigation pad. This displays a menu to the right.• To return to the folder overview, push the back button .• To return to the live image, push the image archive button .12.5 Editing a saved image12.5.1 GeneralYou can edit a saved image. You can also edit an image in preview mode.12.5.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery .2. Select a folder and push the navigation pad.3. Select the image you want to edit and push the navigation pad.4. Push the navigation pad to display the top toolbar.5. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.6. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad. This opens theimage in edit mode.7. Manual image adjustment mode is now active. For image adjustment instructions,see section 14.3 Adjusting the infrared image, page 51.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 44
Saving and working with images128. Push the navigation pad. This displays a context menu.• Select (Cancel) to exit edit mode.• Select (Measurement parameters) to change the global parameters.• Select (Image mode) to change the image mode.• Select (Measurement) to add a measurement tool.• Select (Color) to change the color palette or set a color alarm.• Select (Save) to save and exit edit mode.12.5.3 Related topics• 14.6 Changing the measurement parameters, page 57.• 15 Working with image modes, page 59.• 16 Working with measurement tools, page 62.• 14.5 Changing the color palettes, page 55.• 17 Working with color alarms and isotherms, page 71.12.6 Zooming an image12.6.1 GeneralYou can zoom an image by using the camera’s digital zoom function. You can do this onlive images and on saved images in edit mode.The digital zoom factor is displayed at the top of the screen.12.6.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. To digitally zoom an image, do the following:• Zoom in: Touch the screen with two fingers and spread the fingers apart.• Zoom out: Touch the screen with two fingers and pinch the fingers together.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 45
Saving and working with images1212.7 Deleting imagesYou can delete image files from the memory card. For more information, see sections13.8 Deleting an image or video file, page 49, 13.9 Deleting multiple files, page 50, and13.10 Deleting all files, page 50.12.8 Resetting the image counter12.8.1 GeneralYou can reset the numbering of the image filenames.Note To prevent image files being overwritten, the new counter value will be based onthe highest existing filename number in the image archive.12.8.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Settings) and push the navigation pad. This displays the Settings menu.3. Use the navigation pad to select Device settings >Reset options >Reset imagecounter....4. Push the navigation pad. This displays a dialog box.5. To reset the counter, select Reset and push the navigation pad.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 46
Working with the image archive1313.1 GeneralWhen you save an image or video clip, the camera stores the image/video file in the im-age archive on the memory card. You can open an image in the image archive and, forexample, select another image mode, apply color alarms, and add measurement tools.You can also open and play saved video clips.In the camera, the image archive is called Gallery. The Gallery can include one or severalfolders. New images and video clips will be saved to the active folder, at the top of theGallery. You can create new folders, rename a folder, change the active folder, move filesbetween the folders, and delete folders.13.1.1 Managing folders via soft buttonThe soft button can be used to open a menu, where you can create new folders andchange the active folder.13.2 Opening image and video filesFollow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery with one or morefolders.2. Select a folder and push the navigation pad.3. Select the image or video clip you want to view and push the navigation pad.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 47
Working with the image archive134. To view the previous/next image or video clip, push the navigation pad left/right.5. To return to the folder overview, push the back button .6. To return to the Gallery, push the back button again.13.3 Creating a new folderFollow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery .2. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.3. A soft keyboard is displayed, where you can enter the name of the folder by touchingthe screen.4. When completed, touch Done on the soft keyboard.5. The new folder automatically becomes the active folder and appears at the top of theGallery.Note You can also create a new folder via the soft button .13.4 Renaming a folderYou can change the name of the folders in the archive. The active folder cannot berenamed.Follow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery .2. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.3. Select the folder to rename and push the navigation pad.4. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.5. A soft keyboard is displayed, where you can enter the new name of the folder bytouching the screen.6. When completed, touch Done on the soft keyboard.13.5 Changing the active folder13.5.1 GeneralNew images and video clips are saved to the active folder.13.5.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery .2. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.3. Select the folder that new images and video clips should be saved to and push thenavigation pad. This marks the selected folder with a tick.4. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.5. The selected folder is moved to the top of the Gallery.Note You can also change the active folder via the soft button .#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 48
Working with the image archive1313.6 Moving files between foldersFollow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery .2. Select a folder and push the navigation pad.3. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.4. Use the navigation pad to select the image and video items you want to move. Youcan also select the items by touching the screen. Selected items are marked with atick.5. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.6. Select the destination folder for the selected items and push the navigation pad.13.7 Deleting a folderYou can delete a folder in the archive. The active folder cannot be deleted.Follow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery .2. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.3. Select the folder to delete and push the navigation pad.4. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad. This displays adialog box.5. To delete the folder, select Delete and push the navigation pad.13.8 Deleting an image or video file13.8.1 GeneralYou can delete an image or video file from the image archive.Note When deleting an image file, both images in the image file (thermal and visual)will be deleted.13.8.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery .2. Select a folder and push the navigation pad.3. Select the image or video clip you want to delete and push the navigation pad.4. Push the navigation pad to display the top toolbar.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 49
Working with the image archive135. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.6. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad. This displays adialog box.7. To delete the image, select Delete and push the navigation pad.13.9 Deleting multiple files13.9.1 GeneralYou can delete multiple image and video files from the image archive.13.9.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery .2. Select a folder and push the navigation pad.3. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.4. Use the navigation pad to select the image and video items you want to delete. Youcan also select the items by touching the screen. Selected items are marked with atick.5. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad. This displays adialog box.6. To delete the selected items, select Delete and push the navigation pad.13.10 Deleting all files13.10.1 GeneralYou can delete all image and video files from the memory card.13.10.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Settings) and push the navigation pad. This displays the Settings menu.3. Use the navigation pad to select Save options & storage >Delete all saved files... .4. Push the navigation pad. This displays a dialog box.5. To permanently delete all saved files, select Delete and push the navigation pad.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 50
Achieving a good image1414.1 GeneralA good image depends on several different functions and settings, although some func-tions and settings affect the image more than others.These are the functions and settings that you need to experiment with:• Adjusting the infrared camera focus.• Adjusting the infrared image (automatically or manually).• Selecting a suitable temperature range.• Selecting a suitable color palette.• Changing the measurement parameters.• Performing a non-uniformity correction (NUC).The following sections explain how to work with these functions and settings.In some situations, you may also want to hide the overlay graphics for a better view.14.2 Adjusting the infrared camera focusIt is very important to adjust the focus correctly. Incorrect focus adjustment affects howthe image modes work. It also affects the temperature measurement.14.2.1 Manual focusYou can adjust the focus manually by rotating the focus ring. For more information, seesection 11.5 Adjusting the infrared camera focus manually, page 29.14.2.2 AutofocusYou can autofocus the infrared camera by pushing the Autofocus button. For more infor-mation, see section 11.6 Autofocusing the infrared camera, page 29.WARNINGWhen the camera is set to autofocusing with the laser method (Settings >Device settings >Focus >Au-to focus >Laser), do not point the camera at the face of a person when you use the autofocus function.The laser beam can cause eye irritation.Note You can also assign the autofocus function to one of the programmable buttons. For more information, see section 11.12 Assigning functions to the programmablebuttons, page 34.14.2.3 Continuous autofocusThe infrared camera can be set up to perform continuous autofocusing. For more infor-mation, see section 11.7 Continuous autofocus, page 30.WARNINGDo not point the camera at the face of a person when the continuous autofocus function is on. The cam-era uses laser distance measurements (that are continuous) for the focus adjustments. The laser beamcan cause eye irritation.14.3 Adjusting the infrared image14.3.1 GeneralAn infrared image can be adjusted automatically or manually.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 51
Achieving a good image14In automatic mode, the camera continuously adjusts the level and span for the best im-age presentation. The colors are distributed based on the thermal content of the image(histogram color distribution). The temperature scale to the right of the screen shows theupper and lower temperatures of the current span.In manual mode, you can adjust the temperature scale to values close to the temperatureof a specific object in the image. This will make it possible to detect anomalies and small-er temperature differences in the part of the image of interest. In manual mode, the col-ors are distributed evenly from the lowest to the highest temperature (linear colordistribution).When manual image adjustment mode is active, an adjustment wheel is displayed to theright of the temperature scale.Figure 14.1 Manual adjustment mode activeIn manual mode, you can adjust the image by touching the screen or by using the naviga-tion pad. For more information, see sections 14.3.2 Manual adjustment by touching thescreen, page 53 and 14.3.3 Manual adjustment by using the navigation pad, page 54.• In live mode, touch the soft button to switch between automatic and manual imageadjustment modes.• In preview/edit mode, manual image adjustment mode is active.Note You can also assign image adjustment functions to the programmable buttons.For more information, see section 11.12 Assigning functions to the programmable but-tons, page 34.•Switch between auto and manual: Allows you to switch between automatic and man-ual image adjustment modes.•Auto adjust the manual temperature scale: Allows you to perform an automatic adjust-ment of the image while remaining in manual image adjustment mode.14.3.1.1 Example 1Here are two infrared images of a building. In the left image, which is auto-adjusted, thelarge temperature span between the clear sky and the heated building makes a correctanalysis difficult. You can analyze the building in more detail if you change the tempera-ture scale to values close to the temperature of the building.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 52
Achieving a good image14Automatic Manual14.3.1.2 Example 2Here are two infrared images of an isolator in a power line. To make it easier to analyzethe temperature variations in the isolator, the temperature scale in the right image hasbeen changed to values close to the temperature of the isolator.Automatic Manual14.3.2 Manual adjustment by touching the screen14.3.2.1 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. In live mode, touch the soft button to enter manual image adjustment mode.2. To simultaneously change the temperature scale minimum and maximum limits,place your finger on the screen and move it up/down.3. To change the minimum limit or the maximum limit, do the following:• Touch the maximum or minimum temperature that you want to change.• Place your finger on the screen and move it up/down to change the value of thehighlighted temperature.14.3.2.2 Auto-adjusting the image in manual modeIn manual image adjustment mode, you can auto-adjust the image by touching thescreen. The image will be auto-adjusted based on the thermal content of the area aroundthe touched point. The top and bottom levels in the temperature scale will be set to themaximum and minimum temperatures in that area. By using the color information only forthe relevant temperatures, you will get more details in your area of interest.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 53
Achieving a good image1414.3.2.3 Locking the touch screenWhen you have adjusted the image to levels that allow you to study your area of interest,you can lock the touch screen to prevent further unintentional adjustments.To lock the screen, touch the icon to the left of the temperature scale.To unlock the screen, touch the icon to the left of the temperature scale.Note If you switch to automatic image adjustment mode, the screen automatically un-locks and your manual adjustments are lost.14.3.3 Manual adjustment by using the navigation pad14.3.3.1 Manual adjustment modesThere are two different settings for the manual adjustment mode (applicable for the navi-gation pad only):•Level, Span: With this setting, you can manually adjust the level and span by usingthe navigation pad.•Level, Max, Min: With this setting, you can manually adjust the level by using the navi-gation pad. You can also change the upper and lower temperatures individually.Select the type of manual image adjustment mode under (Settings) > Device set-tings >User interface options >Manual adjustment mode.14.3.4 Manual adjustment in Level, Span modeNote This procedure assumes that you have configured the camera for manual imageadjustments in Level, Span mode. Select Settings >Device settings >User interface op-tions >Manual adjustment mode =Level, Span.Follow this procedure:1. In live mode, touch the soft button to enter manual image adjustment mode.2. Push the navigation pad up/down to increase/decrease the level.3. Push the navigation pad left/right to increase/decrease the span.14.3.5 Manual adjustment in Level, Max, Min modeNote This procedure assumes that you have configured the camera for manual imageadjustments in Level, Max, Min mode. Select Settings >Device settings >User interfaceoptions >Manual adjustment mode =Level, Max, Min.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 54
Achieving a good image14Follow this procedure:1. In live mode, touch the soft button to enter manual image adjustment mode.2. To simultaneously change the temperature scale minimum and maximum limits, pushthe navigation pad up/down.3. To change the minimum limit or the maximum limit, do the following:• Push the navigation pad left/right to select (highlight) the maximum or minimumtemperature.• Push the navigation pad up/down to change the value of the highlightedtemperature.14.4 Changing the camera temperature range14.4.1 GeneralThe camera is calibrated for different temperature ranges. Available temperature rangeoptions are dependent on the camera model.For accurate temperature measurements, you must change the Camera temperaturerange setting to suit the expected temperature of the object you are inspecting.Note For more information, see section 34 About calibration, page 192.14.4.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Settings) and push the navigation pad. This displays the Settings menu.3. Select Camera temperature range and push the navigation pad. This displays a dia-log box.4. Select the appropriate temperature range and push the navigation pad.Note You can also assign the function Switch temperature range to one of the program-mable buttons . For more information, see section 11.12 Assigning functions to theprogrammable buttons, page 34.14.5 Changing the color palettes14.5.1 GeneralYou can change the color palette that the camera uses to display different temperatures.A different palette can make it easier to analyze an image.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 55
Achieving a good image14Iron ArcticRainbow Rainbow high contrastWhite hot Black hotLava14.5.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Color) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 56
Achieving a good image143. Use the navigation pad to select a different palette.4. Push the navigation pad to confirm and exit the menu mode.14.6 Changing the measurement parametersFor accurate measurements, it is important to set the measurement parameters:•External IR window compensation.•Object distance.•Atmospheric temperature.•Relative humidity.•Reflected temperature.•Emissivity.You can set the measurement parameters globally. You can also change the Emissivity,Reflected temperature, and Object distance parameters locally for a measurement tool.For more information, see section 16.5 Changing the measurement parameters, page 64.14.7 Performing a non-uniformity correction(NUC)When the thermal camera displays Calibrating... it is performing what in thermography iscalled a ”non-uniformity correction” (NUC). An NUC is an image correction carried out bythe camera software to compensate for different sensitivities of detector elements andother optical and geometrical disturbances2. For more information, see section 34 Aboutcalibration, page 192.An NUC is performed automatically, for example at start-up, when changing a measure-ment range, or when the environment temperature changes.You can also perform an NUC manually. This is useful when you have to perform a criticalmeasurement with as little image disturbance as possible. You may, for example, want toperform a manual calibration just before you start recording a video sequence.14.7.1 Performing an NUC manually14.7.1.1 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. To perform a manual NUC, push and hold down the image archive button formore than 2 seconds.Note You can also assign the function Calibrate to the one of the programmable but-tons . For more information, see section 11.12 Assigning functions to the program-mable buttons, page 34.14.8 Hiding all overlay14.8.1 GeneralThe camera overlay consists of overlay graphics and image overlay information. Theoverlay graphics include items such as measurement tool symbols, result tables, andstatus icons. The image overlay information, which you activate on the Settings menu,provides additional information such as the date, emissivity, and atmospheric tempera-ture. For more information, see section 9.6 Image overlay information, page 24.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 572. Definition from the European standard EN 16714-3:2016, Non-destructive Testing—Thermographic Testing—Part 3: Terms and Definitions.
Achieving a good image14You can hide all camera overlay by touching the soft button .Note You can also assign the function Hide image overlay graphics to one of the pro-grammable buttons . For more information, see section 11.12 Assigning functions tothe programmable buttons, page 34.Image with camera overlay and image overlayinformation.Image with all overlay hidden.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 58
Working with image modes1515.1 GeneralThe camera can capture both thermal and visual images at the same time. By choosingthe image mode, you select which type of image to display on the screen.The camera supports the following image modes:•Thermal: An infrared image is displayed.•Thermal MSX (Multi Spectral Dynamic Imaging): The camera displays an infrared im-age where the edges of the objects are enhanced with visual image details.•Picture in picture: An infrared image frame is displayed on top of the visual image.•Digital camera: The visual image captured by the digital camera is displayed.•Macro: This mode enables the camera to focus on objects very close to the cameralens. An infrared image is displayed.Note• For the Thermal MSX,Thermal, and Picture in picture image modes, all thermal andvisual information is stored when an image is saved. This means that you can edit theimage later, in the image archive, or in FLIR Tools/Tools+ or FLIR Report Studio, andselect any of the image modes.• For the Digital camera image mode, a digital image with full resolution (5 MP) is storedwhen an image is saved. However, no thermal information is stored.• The Thermal MSX,Thermal, and Picture in picture image modes only work correctlyfor calibrated lenses. The lens that ships with the camera is factory calibrated. To cali-brate a new lens, you must send the camera and the lens to your local servicedepartment.• When the Macro mode is selected, the laser is automatically disabled.• The support for the Macro mode depends on the camera lens.• In Macro mode, no visual information is saved.15.2 Image examplesThis table explains the different types of image modes.Image mode ImageThermalThermal MSX#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 59
Working with image modes15Image mode ImagePicture in pictureDigital cameraMacro15.3 Selecting an image modeFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Image mode) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 60
Working with image modes153. Use the navigation pad to select one of the following:•(Thermal MSX).•(Thermal).•(Picture in picture).•(Digital camera).•(Macro).Note• If the *.csq video format is selected (Settings >Save options & storage >Videocompression) and the recording mode Video is selected, it will only be possible toselect the image modes Thermal and Macro.• If the digital camera is disabled (Settings >Save options & storage >Digital cam-era = Off), it will only be possible to select the image modes Thermal and Macro.4. Push the navigation pad to confirm and exit the menu mode.5. If Picture in picture mode is selected, you can at this point move and resize the infra-red image frame using the touch screen.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 61
Working with measurement tools1616.1 GeneralTo measure a temperature, you can use one or more measurement tools, e.g., a spot-meter or a box.16.2 Adding/removing measurement toolsFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Measurement) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.3. Use the navigation pad to select one of the following:• Select (No measurements) to remove all tools.• Select (Center spot) to add a center spot.• Select (Hot spot) to add a hot spot detection within a box area.• Select (Cold spot) to add a cold spot detection within a box area.• Select (User preset 1) to add user preset 1. (Not available in all cameramodels.)• Select (User preset 2) to add user preset 2. (Not available in all cameramodels.)4. Push the navigation pad to confirm and exit the menu mode.16.3 Editing user presets16.3.1 GeneralA user preset is a measurement tool, or a group of measurement tools, with predefinedcharacteristics.16.3.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 62
Working with measurement tools162. Select (Measurement) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.3. Use the navigation pad to select (User preset 1) or (User preset 2).4. Push and hold the center of the navigation pad. This displays the Edit user presetmenu.5. Select (Add measurement) and push the navigation pad. This displays asubmenu.6. Use the navigation pad to select one of the following:• Select (Add spot) to add a spot.• Select (Add box) to add a box.• Select (Add circle) to add a circle.• Select (Add delta) to set up a differential calculation.7. Push the navigation pad. This displays the measurement tool on the screen.8. Push the navigation pad. This displays a context menu, where you can select one ormore of the following actions (depending on the type of tool):• Remove the tool.• Resize, move, center, and rotate the tool.• Set alarms.• Display maximum, minimum, average, and area values.• Set local parameters.• When completed, select (Done) and push the navigation pad.9. When all measurement tools have been added, select (Save as user preset).10. Push the navigation pad to confirm and exit the menu mode.16.4 Moving and resizing a measurement tool16.4.1 GeneralYou can move and resize a measurement tool.Note When you select another measurement tool, any changes of position and size ofthe current tool will be lost. If you wish to keep the position and size settings, use the userpreset feature, see section 16.3 Editing user presets, page 62.16.4.2 Moving a spotNote You can also move the spot by touching the screen.Follow this procedure:1. To select the measurement tool, touch the tool on the screen. The tool is now dis-played with one or more handles.2. Push the navigation pad—or touch and hold the tool. This displays a context menu.3. To move the spot, do the following:3.1. Select (Move spot) and push the navigation pad.3.2. Push the navigation pad up/down and left/right to move the spot.4. To center the spot, select Center spot and push the navigation pad.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 63
Working with measurement tools165. When completed, push the navigation pad and select (Done).6. Push the navigation pad to confirm and exit the menu mode.16.4.3 Moving and resizing a box or circle toolNote You can also move and resize the measurement tool by touching the screen.Follow this procedure:1. To select the measurement tool, touch the tool on the screen. The tool is now dis-played with one or more handles.2. Push the navigation pad—or touch and hold the tool. This displays a context menu.3. Select (Move/resize) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.4. Use the navigation pad to select one of the following:• Select (Resize) to change the size of the tool.• Select (Move) to move the tool.• Select (Center box/circle) to center the box or circle tool.5. Push the navigation pad up/down and left/right to resize or move the tool.6. When completed, push the navigation pad and select (Done).7. Push the navigation pad to confirm and exit the menu mode.16.5 Changing the measurement parameters16.5.1 GeneralFor accurate measurements, it is important to set the measurement parameters.Note During normal operation there is typically no need to change the default meas-urement parameters, see section 16.5.3 Recommended values, page 65.16.5.2 Types of parametersThe camera can use these measurement parameters:•External IR window compensation, i.e., the temperature of any protective windows,external lenses (e.g., the close-up lens), etc., that are set up between the camera andthe object of interest. If no protective window, protective shield, or external lens isused, this value is irrelevant and should be left inactive.•Object distance, i.e., the distance between the camera and the object of interest.Note The camera can be configured to automatically measure the distance whenan image is saved. With this setting, the Object distance parameter in the image datais automatically updated with the measured distance when an image is saved. (Thereis no effect on the Object distance setting in live mode.) For more information, seesection 8.4 Laser distance meter and laser pointer, page 19.•Atmospheric temperature, i.e., the temperature of the air between the camera and theobject of interest.•Relative humidity, i.e., the relative humidity of the air between the camera and the ob-ject of interest.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 64
Working with measurement tools16•Reflected temperature, which is used when compensating for the radiation from thesurroundings reflected by the object into the camera. This property of the object iscalled “reflectivity.”•Emissivity, i.e., how much radiation an object emits, compared with the radiation of atheoretical reference object at the same temperature (called a “blackbody”). The op-posite of emissivity is reflectivity. The emissivity determines how much of the radiationoriginates from the object as opposed to being reflected by it.Note There is an Emissivity mode setting, which you can use to enter the emissivityby material instead of by value. Select (Settings) > Device settings >User inter-face options >Emissivity mode >Select from materials table.Emissivity is the most important measurement parameter to set correctly. If the Emissivityis set to a low value, the Reflected temperature also becomes important. The parametersObject distance,Atmospheric temperature, and Relative humidity are relevant for longerdistances. The External IR window compensation must be activated if a protective win-dow or external lens is used.16.5.3 Recommended valuesIf you are unsure about the values, the following are recommended:Object distance 1.0 m (3.3 ft.)Atmospheric temperature 20°C (69°F)Relative humidity 50%Reflected temperature 20°C (69°F)Emissivity 0.9516.5.4 ProcedureYou can set the measurement parameters globally. You can also change the Emissivity,Reflected temperature, and Object distance parameters locally for a measurement tool.Local parameters are normally only effective for a fixed setup, where each measurementtool is set for a specific object of interest. For a general handheld application, the globalparameters are usually sufficient.Note Emissivity and Reflected temperature are the two most important measurementparameters to set correctly in the camera.16.5.4.1 Setting global parametersFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Measurement parameters) and push the navigation pad. This displays asubmenu.3. Use the navigation pad to select one or more of the global measurement parameters:•(External IR window compensation).•(Object distance).•(Atmospheric temperature).•(Relative humidity).•(Reflected temperature).•(Emissivity).#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 65
Working with measurement tools164. Push the navigation pad to display a dialog box.5. Use the navigation pad to change the parameter.6. Push the navigation pad to confirm and exit the menu mode.16.5.4.2 Changing local parametersYou can change the local parameters for a measurement tool.APnext to the measurement tool on the screen indicates that local parameters havebeen activated for the tool.Follow this procedure:1. To select the measurement tool, touch the tool on the screen. The tool is now dis-played with one or more handles.2. Push the navigation pad—or touch and hold the tool. This displays a context menu.3. Select (Use local parameters).4. Push the navigation pad. (icon with unfilled indicator) is displayed.5. Push the navigation pad to activate the use of local parameters. (icon with filledindicator) is displayed together with a submenu.6. Use the navigation pad to select one or more of the local measurement parameters.7. Push the navigation pad to display a dialog box.8. Use the navigation pad to change the parameter.9. Push the navigation pad. This closes the dialog box.10. When completed, push the navigation pad and select (Done).11. Push the navigation pad to confirm and exit the menu mode.Note When you select another measurement tool, the local parameters are reset. Ifyou wish to keep the local parameter settings, use the user preset feature, see section16.3 Editing user presets, page 62.16.5.5 Related topicsFor in-depth information about parameters, and how to correctly set the emissivity andreflected apparent temperature, see section 32 Thermographic measurement techni-ques, page 181.16.6 Displaying values in the result table16.6.1 GeneralFor the box and circle tools, you can set the camera to display the maximum, minimum,average, and area values in the result table.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 66
Working with measurement tools1616.6.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. To select the measurement tool, touch the tool on the screen. The tool is now dis-played with one or more handles.2. Push the navigation pad—or touch and hold the tool. This displays a context menu.3. Use the navigation pad to select (Max/Min/Avg).4. Push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.5. Use the navigation pad to select one or more of the following:• Select (Max) to display the maximum value.• Select (Min) to display the minimum value.• Select (Avg) to display the average value.• Select (depending on the tool) or (Area) to display the area of an objectwithin the measurement tool. Area measurements require that the laser is enabled(Settings >Device settings >Lamp & laser >Enable lamp & laser). For more infor-mation, see section 11.9 Measuring areas, page 32.• Select (Max & min markers) to display the maximum and minimum markers(the hot/cold spots).6. Push the navigation pad to toggle the function between inactive and active:• When the icon with the unfilled indicator is displayed, the function is inactive.• When the icon with the filled indicator is displayed, the function is active.7. When completed, push the navigation pad down to close the submenu.8. Select (Done) and push the navigation pad.16.7 Creating and setting up a differencecalculation16.7.1 GeneralA difference calculation gives the difference between the values of two known measure-ment results.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 67
Working with measurement tools1616.7.2 ProcedureNote• You can set up a difference calculation when defining user presets, or when editing animage in the archive.• This procedure assumes that you have previously laid out at least one measurementtool on the screen.16.7.2.1 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. To set up a difference calculation, do the following:• If you are defining user presets, select (Add measurement) and then select(Add delta).• If you are editing an image in the archive, select (Measurement) and then se-lect (Add delta).2. Push the navigation pad. This displays a dialog box where you can select the meas-urement tools that you want to use in the difference calculation. You can also select afixed-temperature reference.3. Push the navigation pad. The result of the difference calculation is now displayed onthe screen.16.8 Setting a measurement alarm16.8.1 GeneralYou can make the camera trigger an alarm when certain measurement conditions aremet.16.8.2 Types of alarmYou can choose between the following alarm types:•Above: Triggers an alarm when the temperature is above the preset alarmtemperature.•Below: Triggers an alarm when the temperature is below the preset alarmtemperature.16.8.3 Alarm signalsWhen an alarm is set, the symbol is displayed in the result table.When an alarm is triggered, the value in the result table is displayed in red (above alarm)or blue (below alarm) and the symbol (above alarm) or (below alarm) is blinking.You can also set an audible alarm (there will be a “beep” when the alarm is triggered).16.8.4 ProcedureThere are different procedures for setting up an alarm for a spot, for a box or circle, andfor a difference calculation.16.8.4.1 Setting up an alarm for a spotFollow this procedure:1. To select the spot, touch the tool on the screen. The tool is now displayed with aframe.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 68
Working with measurement tools162. Push the navigation pad—or touch and hold the tool. This displays a context menu.3. Select (Set alarm on spot) and push the navigation pad. This displays a dialogbox.4. In the dialog box, you can define the settings for the alarm.•Alarm condition: The condition that triggers the alarm. Applicable values areAbove,Below,orOff.•Alarm limit: The temperature value that will be the critical condition when an alarmis triggered or not.•Alarm sound: Applicable values are Beep or No sound.5. Push the navigation pad. This closes the dialog box.16.8.4.2 Setting up an alarm for a box or circleNote This procedure assumes that you have previously set the camera to display atleast one value (maximum, minimum, or average) in the result table. For more informa-tion, see section 16.6 Displaying values in the result table, page 66.Follow this procedure:1. To select the measurement tool, touch the tool on the screen. The tool is now dis-played with one or more handles.2. Push the navigation pad—or touch and hold the tool. This displays a context menu.3. Select (Set alarm) and push the navigation pad. This displays a dialog box.4. In the dialog box, you can define the settings for the alarm.•Alarm condition: The condition that triggers the alarm. Applicable values areAbove,Below,orOff.•Select measurement: Applicable settings are the values you have previously de-fined (Max,Min, and/or Avg).•Alarm limit: The temperature value that will be the critical condition when an alarmis triggered or not.•Alarm sound: Applicable values are Beep or No sound.5. Push the navigation pad. This closes the dialog box.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 69
Working with measurement tools1616.8.4.3 Setting up an alarm for a difference calculationNote• You can set up an alarm for a difference calculation when defining user presets, orwhen editing an image in the archive.• This procedure assumes that you have previously set up a difference calculation.Follow this procedure:1. To set up an alarm for a difference calculation, do the following:• If you are defining user presets, select (Add measurement).• If you are editing an image in the archive, select (Measurement).2. Select (Select) and push the navigation pad. This displays a dialog box.3. Select Delta and push the navigation pad. This displays a context menu.4. Select (Set alarm on delta) and push the navigation pad. This displays a dialogbox.5. In the dialog box, you can define the settings for the alarm.•Alarm condition: The condition that triggers the alarm. Applicable values areAbove,Below,orOff.•Alarm limit: The temperature value that will be the critical condition when an alarmis triggered or not.•Alarm sound: Applicable values are Beep or No sound.6. Push the navigation pad. This closes the dialog box.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 70
Working with color alarms andisotherms1717.1 Color alarms17.1.1 GeneralBy using color alarms (isotherms), anomalies can easily be discovered in an infrared im-age. The isotherm command applies a contrasting color to all pixels with a temperatureabove, below, or between the set temperature levels. The camera also features isothermtypes that are specific to the building trade: condensation and insulation alarms.You can make the camera trigger the following types of color alarms:•Above alarm: This will apply a contrasting color to all pixels with a temperature abovethe specified temperature level.•Below alarm: This will apply a contrasting color to all pixels with a temperature belowthe specified temperature level.•Interval alarm: This will apply a contrasting color to all pixels with a temperature be-tween two specified temperature levels.•Condensation alarm: Triggers when the camera detects a surface where the relativehumidity exceeds a preset value.•Insulation alarm: Triggers when there is an insulation deficiency in a wall.17.1.2 Image examplesThis table explains the different color alarms (isotherms).Color alarm ImageAbove alarmBelow alarm#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 71
Working with color alarms and isotherms17Color alarm ImageInterval alarmCondensation alarmInsulation alarm17.1.3 Setting up above, below, and interval alarmsFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Color) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.3. Use the navigation pad to select one of the following:•(Above alarm).•(Below alarm).•(Interval alarm).4. Push the navigation pad. The threshold temperature is displayed at the top of thescreen.5. To change the threshold temperature, do the following:• For the Interval alarm, push the navigation pad left/right to select the low/high-tem-perature value.• Push the navigation pad up/down to change the threshold temperature.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 72
Working with color alarms and isotherms1717.1.4 Building isothermsNote The Condensation and Insulation alarms are not supported by all camera models.17.1.4.1 About the Condensation alarmTo detect areas with potential moisture problems, you can use the Condensation alarm.You can set the relative humidity above which the isotherm will colorize the image.17.1.4.2 About the Insulation alarmThe Insulation alarm can detect areas where there may be an insulation deficiency in thebuilding. It will trigger when the insulation level (which is called the thermal index in thecamera) falls below a preset value of the energy leakage through a wall.Different building codes recommend different values for the insulation level, but typicalvalues are 60–80% for new buildings. Refer to your national building code forrecommendations.17.1.4.3 Setting up condensation and insulation alarmsFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Color) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.3. Use the navigation pad to select one of the following:•(Condensation alarm).•(Insulation alarm).#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 73
Working with color alarms and isotherms174. Push the navigation pad. This displays a dialog box where you can define the settingsfor the alarm.For the Condensation alarm, the following parameters can be set:•Atmospheric temperature: The current atmospheric temperature.•Relative humidity: The current relative humidity.•Relative humidity limit: The relative humidity level at which you want the alarm tobe triggered. A relative humidity of 100% means that water vapor condenses fromthe air as liquid water (= dewpoint). A relative humidity of about 70% or above cancause mold.For the Insulation alarm, the following parameters can be set:•Indoor temperature: The current indoor temperature.•Outdoor temperature: The current outdoor temperature.•Thermal index: The insulation level (an integer between 0 and 100).5. Push the navigation pad. This closes the dialog box.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 74
Annotating images1818.1 GeneralYou can save additional information with an infrared image by using annotations. Annota-tions make reporting and post-processing more efficient by providing essential informa-tion about the image, e.g., conditions and information about where an image is taken.Annotations are added to the image file, and can be viewed and edited in the image ar-chive, and also when moving files from the camera to reporting software on the computer.• You can set the camera to display annotation tools when an image is saved. Select(Settings) > Save options & storage >Add annotation after saving.• You can also add annotations to a saved image in the image archive.Note This section describes the procedures for adding annotations to a saved imagein the image archive. Adding annotations when saving an image works in a similar way.18.2 Adding a note18.2.1 GeneralYou can add a text note to the image file. Using this feature, you can annotate images byentering free-form text.18.2.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Open the image in the image archive.2. Push the navigation pad to display the top toolbar.3. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.4. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.5. A soft keyboard is displayed, where you can enter text by touching the screen.6. When completed, touch Done on the soft keyboard.18.3 Adding a text comment table18.3.1 GeneralYou can save a table with textual information to the image file. This feature is a very effi-cient way of recording information when you are inspecting a large number of similar#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 75
Annotating images18objects. The idea behind using a table with textual information is to avoid filling out formsor inspection protocols manually.The camera ships with an example text comment table template. You can also createyour own templates. For more information, see section 18.3.3 Creating a text commenttable template, page 77.18.3.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Open the image in the image archive.2. Push the navigation pad to display the top toolbar.3. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.4. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad. This displays atable.5. (Optional step.) On the top toolbar, do one of the following:• To clear the content of the current table, select the icon and push the naviga-tion pad.• To select another table template, select the icon and push the navigation pad.6. For each row in the table, do the following:• Push the navigation pad. This displays the predefined values.• Push the navigation pad up/down to select a predefined value. Push the naviga-tion pad to confirm.• Instead of selecting a predefined value, you can select the keyboard iconand enter other text by touching the screen.Note Text entered by the keyboard will be saved to the text comment table tem-plate. Next time you add a text comment table annotation, the entered text will bedisplayed as a predefined value.7. When completed, select Save & Exit at the bottom of the table. Push the navigationpad to confirm.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 76
Annotating images1818.3.3 Creating a text comment table template18.3.3.1 GeneralYou can create a text comment table template in different ways:• Using FLIR Tools/Tools+, see section 18.3.3.2 Creating a table template using FLIRTools/Tools+, page 77.• Manually creating a text comment file (*.tcf), see section 18.3.3.3 Manually creating atable template, page 77.18.3.3.2 Creating a table template using FLIR Tools/Tools+Note If your camera uses an SD card that has been used in another camera, FLIRTools/Tools+ cannot create proper templates for this camera. Please clear the SD cardentirely before using tables templates from FLIR Tools/Tools+.18.3.3.2.1 GeneralIn FLIR Tools/Tools+, you can create text annotation templates on the Templates tab.These templates can either be transferred to the camera or used as a template duringpost-analysis in the program.18.3.3.2.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Click the Templates tab.2. Click the Add new text annotations template toolbar button.3. Create a name for the template.4. Enter the desired fields and values. See the image below for examples.5. Save the template.6. Do one of the following:• To use the template in the camera, connect a camera to FLIR Tools/Tools+ andtransfer the template to the camera.• To use the template during post-analysis in FLIR Tools/Tools+, double-click an im-age, and then click Import from template under Text annotations in the right pane.18.3.3.3 Manually creating a table template18.3.3.3.1 GeneralA text comment file (*.tcf) is an annotation format that is proprietary to FLIR Systems. Itdefines a table structure that can be used to add text table annotations to FLIR images.You can create text comment files (*.tcf files) and use these files as table templates inthe camera.The camera ships with an example text comment table file: example_text_comment.tcf.The file is stored on the memory card in the subfolder \TextTableTemplates. You canmake a copy of the example file and modify it using a text editor such as MicrosoftNotepad.When creating or modifying a text comment file, keep the following rules in mind:1. Lines starting with “#” are regarded as comments and will be ignored.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 77
Annotating images182. Lines that start with “<” and end with “>” are labels and will appear on the left-handside of the table.3. Non-empty lines under a label line are regarded as values and will be displayed asoptions to the label above.4. When you save the file, select UTF-8 encoding. With UTF-8 encoding, the file willsupport all languages currently supported by the camera.5. The template will be updated by the camera if you add or remove values in the text ta-ble annotations dialog in the camera. This enables you to modify its content whileyou are working with the camera.6. The camera will find all text table template files if:• They are placed on the memory card in the subfolder \TextTableTemplates.• They have an ASCII filename and the file extension .tcf. (ASCII characters includea–z, A–Z, 0–9, and basic punctuation, and spaces can be used. The file can con-tain non-ASCII text, but the filename must be ASCII.)18.3.3.3.2 Example mark-up structureThe file format for the text comment table template is *.tcf. This code sample is an exam-ple mark-up structure of such a file, and shows how the mark-up appears in a text editorsuch as Notepad.<Site>Company ACompany B<Location>Substation A<Object>EngineVentVaultDoor<ObjectID>A1a1A1b2A1c3<Deviation>OverloadMoistureDraft<Remedy>ReplaceFixNo action<Severity>CriticalNon-critical<Severity>18.4 Adding a voice annotation18.4.1 GeneralA voice annotation is an audio recording that is saved to the infrared image file. The re-cording can be played back in the camera, and in image analysis and reporting softwarefrom FLIR Systems.The voice annotation is recorded using the built-in microphone. You can also use a Blue-tooth-enabled headset. For information on how to pair a headset with the camera, seesection 22 Pairing Bluetooth devices, page 85.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 78
Annotating images1818.4.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Open the image in the image archive.2. Push the navigation pad to display the top toolbar.3. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.4. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.5. A context menu is displayed.6. To start a recording, select (Record) and push the navigation pad.7. To stop the recording, select (Stop) and push the navigation pad.8. To listen to the recording, select (Play) and push the navigation pad.9. To delete the recording, select (Delete) and push the navigation pad.10. When completed, select (Done) and push the navigation pad.18.5 Adding a sketch18.5.1 GeneralYou can add a freehand drawing to an infrared image.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 79
Annotating images1818.5.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Open the image in the image archive.2. Push the navigation pad to display the top toolbar.3. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.4. On the right toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.5. You are now in sketch mode. Draw the sketch by touching the screen.6. (Optional step.) Push the navigation pad. This displays a context menu. Do one ormore of the following:• To change the color of the sketch tools, select (Draw) and push the navigationpad. Select the color and push the navigation pad.• To erase, select (Eraser) and push the navigation pad. Erase parts of thesketch by touching the screen.• To add an arrow, circle, or cross, select (Stamp sketch) and push the naviga-tion pad. Select the type of stamp and push the navigation pad. The stamp is dis-played in the center of the screen. You can move the stamp by using thenavigation pad or by touching the screen. When completed, push the navigationpad.• To clear, select (Clear all) and push the navigation pad.• When the sketch is completed, select (Save) and push the navigation pad.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 80
Programming the camera (time-lapse)1919.1 GeneralYou can program the camera to save images periodically (time-lapse).19.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Recording mode) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.3. Select (Time-lapse).4. Push the navigation pad. This displays a dialog box where you can set the saveconditions:•Save interval: Use the navigation pad to set the time interval between each savedimage.•Total number of images: Periodic saving will stop when the set number of imageshave been saved.Note If you select “∞,” the camera will keep on saving images until the memorycard is full or until you manually stop the time-lapse.5. Push the navigation pad. This closes the dialog box.6. The time interval is displayed at the top of the screen.7. To start the time-lapse (periodic saving), push the Save button.8. To manually stop the time-lapse, push the Save button.9. When the time-lapse is completed, an information screen is displayed. Push any but-ton or touch the screen to return to the live image.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 81
Recording video clips2020.1 GeneralYou can record and save video clips to the memory card.Note The camera can be configured to save video in *.mpg or *.csq format. Select(Settings) > Save options & storage >Video compression.•Mpeg (*.mpg): Mpeg recordings cannot be edited after the file has been saved.•Radiometric storage (*csq): A *.csq file supports full radiometry but is only supportedby FLIR Systems software. The file does not include any visual image information.With this setting, only the image modes Thermal and Macro are supported when re-cording video. If any non-supported image mode is active when Video recordingmode is selected, the camera will auto-switch to Thermal image mode.20.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Recording mode) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.3. Select (Video) and push the navigation pad.4. To start a recording, push the Save button. A counter at the top of the screen displaysthe duration of the recording.5. To stop a recording, push the Save button. The recording is automatically saved tothe image archive.20.3 Playing a saved video clipFollow this procedure:1. Push the image archive button . This displays the Gallery with one or morefolders.2. Select a folder and push the navigation pad.3. Select the video clip you want to play and push the navigation pad.4. Push the navigation pad to display the top toolbar.5. On the top toolbar, select the icon and push the navigation pad.6. To play or pause the video clip, push the navigation pad.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 82
Screening alarm2121.1 GeneralThe screening alarm can be used, for example, at airports to detect passengers with ele-vated body temperatures, which may indicate the presence of a fever.The screening alarm can also be used to detect temperature anomalies in a series of in-spected objects in a similar/fixed setup.Activating the screening mode will turn on a measurement box and screening data in theresult table.The sampled average temperature.The alarm temperature.The measured temperature.The alarm will trigger when the measurement box measures a temperature higher thanthe alarm temperature. The alarm temperature is, in turn, the sum of a specified alloweddeviation and a sampled average value.WARNINGMake sure that the laser is disabled when you point the camera at the face of a person. The laser beamcan cause eye irritation. Disable the laser by selecting (Settings) > Device settings >Lamp & laser>Disable all.21.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Enable the screening mode by selecting (Settings) > Device settings >User in-terface options >Screening mode =On.2. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.3. Select (Recording mode) and push the navigation pad. This displays a submenu.4. Select (Screening).5. Push the navigation pad. This displays a dialog box where you can define the settingsfor the alarm:•Allowed deviation: The allowed deviation from the sampled average.•Alarm sound: Applicable values are Beep or No sound.6. Push the navigation pad. This closes the dialog box.7. Aim the camera toward a point of interest. The object should be within the frame ofthe measurement box.8. To reset the sampled average, push and hold the programmable button above thescreen.9. To sample, push the programmable button above the screen.10. Aim the camera toward more points of interest. Sample 10 times to build up a samplebase by pushing the programmable button above the screen.The alarm is now set up and ready to use. Occasionally record a few samples if thealarm is used for a long time or if the conditions change.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 83
Screening alarm21Note• Every time you push the programmable button above the screen, a sample issaved. Make sure you aim the camera toward an object within the interesting tempera-ture range when you push (and hold) the button.• The algorithm has a memory of the last 10 samples. It discriminates between the high-est and lowest values, and calculates an average of the remaining values.• Do not modify the measurement setup or activate another alarm because this will de-activate the screening alarm.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 84
Pairing Bluetooth devices2222.1 GeneralYou can use the camera with the following Bluetooth devices:• METERLiNK devices (FLIR meters).• Bluetooth-enabled headsets.Before you can use a Bluetooth device with the camera, you need to pair the devices.The Bluetooth functionality is managed from the Settings menu. You can also enable/dis-able Bluetooth on the swipe-down menu. For more information, see section 9.5 Swipe-down menu, page 24.22.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Settings) and push the navigation pad. This displays the Settings menu.3. Use the navigation pad to select Connections >Bluetooth.4. If the Bluetooth check box is unchecked, push the navigation pad to enableBluetooth.Note You also need to ensure that the external Bluetooth device is in visible mode.5. Select Available devices and push the navigation pad.6. Wait until a list of available devices is displayed. This will take about 15 seconds.7. When a Bluetooth device is found, select the device to add it, and begin the pairingprocedure. The device is then ready to be used.Note• Only METERLiNK devices (FLIR meters) and Bluetooth-enabled headsets will appearin the list of available devices.• You can add several devices.• You can remove a device by selecting the device and then selecting Unpair device.• After adding a METERLiNK device, such as the FLIR MR77 or FLIR DM93, the resultfrom the meter will be visible in the result table and stored with the images. For moreinformation, see section 24 Fetching data from external FLIR meters, page 87.• After adding a Bluetooth-enabled headset, it is ready to be used for adding voice an-notations. Adding a Bluetooth-enabled headset automatically disables the built-in mi-crophone and speaker.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 85
Configuring Wi-Fi2323.1 GeneralDepending on your camera configuration, you can connect the camera to a wireless localarea network (WLAN) using Wi-Fi, or let the camera provide Wi-Fi access to otherdevices.You can connect the camera in two different ways:•Most common use: Setting up the camera as a wireless access point. This method isprimarily used with other devices, e.g., an iPhone or iPad.•Less common use: Connecting the camera to a wireless local area network (WLAN).The Wi-Fi functionality is managed from the Settings menu. You can also enable/disableWi-Fi on the swipe-down menu. For more information, see section 9.5 Swipe-downmenu, page 24.23.2 Setting up a wireless access point (mostcommon use)Follow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Settings) and push the navigation pad. This displays the Settings menu.3. Use the navigation pad to select Connections >Wi-Fi.4. Select Share and push the navigation pad.5. (Optional step.) To display and change the parameters, select Share settings andpush the navigation pad.• To change the SSID, select Network name (SSID) and push the navigation pad.• To change the WPA2 password, select Password and push the navigation pad.Note These parameters are set for your camera’s network. They will be used by theexternal device to connect that device to the network.23.3 Connecting the camera to a WLAN (lesscommon use)Follow this procedure:1. Push the navigation pad to display the menu system.2. Select (Settings) and push the navigation pad. This displays the Settings menu.3. Use the navigation pad to select Connections >Wi-Fi.4. Select Connect to network and push the navigation pad.5. To display a list of the available networks, select Available networks and push thenavigation pad.6. Select one of the available networks and push the navigation pad.Note Password-protected networks are indicated with a padlock icon, and for theseyou will need to enter a password the first time you connect to the network. After thatthe camera will connect automatically to the network. To disable the automatic con-nection, select Forget network.Note Some networks do not broadcast their existence. They appear in the list as Unti-tled. To connect to such a network, you will be prompted to enter additional parameters.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 86
Fetching data from external FLIRmeters2424.1 GeneralYou can fetch data from some external FLIR meters that support Bluetooth and mergethis data into the infrared image. When the camera is connected to a FLIR meter viaBluetooth, the measurement value from the meter is displayed in the result table of thecamera. The FLIR meter value is also added to the information saved in the image file.In preview mode and when editing an image in the archive, you can add more than onevalue from the same FLIR meter. The last added value is displayed below the previousvalues. The live value is displayed with a dotted outline.If the screen display for values is full, it is still possible to add more values from the FLIRmeter. Added values are then indicated by a box with a number that counts up each timea new value is added.To find out whether a FLIR meter is supported by the camera, consult the meterdocumentation.24.2 Technical support for external metersTechnical supportWebsite http://support.flir.comE-mail TMsupport@flir.comPhone 855-499-3662Repairs repair@flir.com24.3 ProcedureNote• Before you can use a FLIR meter with the camera, you need to pair the devices. Formore information, see section 22 Pairing Bluetooth devices, page 85.• To add more than one FLIR meter value when saving an image, preview mode mustbe enabled. Select (Settings) > Save options and storage >Preview image beforesaving =On.Follow this procedure:1. Turn on the camera.2. Turn on the FLIR meter.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 87
Fetching data from external FLIR meters243. On the FLIR meter, enable Bluetooth mode. Refer to the user documentation for themeter for information on how to do this.4. On the FLIR meter, choose the quantity that you want to use (voltage, current, resist-ance, etc.). Refer to the user documentation for the meter for information on how todo this.Results from the meter will now automatically be displayed in the result table in thetop left corner of the infrared camera screen.5. On the camera, in preview mode and when editing an image in the archive, you cando the following:• Push the programmable button to add the value currently displayed by theFLIR meter.• Push and hold the programmable button to remove all FLIR meter values fromthe image.Note Any function assigned to the programmable button is temporarily disabledwhen in preview mode or when editing an image in the archive.24.4 Typical moisture measurement anddocumentation procedure24.4.1 GeneralThe following procedure can form the basis for other procedures using FLIR meters andinfrared cameras.24.4.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Use the infrared camera to identify any potential damp areas behind walls andceilings.2. Use the moisture meter to measure the moisture levels at various suspect locationsthat may have been found.3. When an area of particular interest is located, store the moisture reading in the mois-ture meter’s memory and identify the measurement area with a handprint or otherthermal identifying marker.4. Recall the reading from the meter memory. The moisture meter will now continuouslytransmit this reading to the infrared camera.5. Use the camera to take a thermal image of the area with the identifying marker. Thestored data from the moisture meter will also be saved on the image.24.5 More informationFor more information, see the user manuals that are shipped with FLIR meters.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 88
Changing settings2525.1 GeneralYou can change a variety of settings in the camera. You do this on the Settings menu.The Settings menu includes the following:•Connections.•Camera temperature range.•Save options & storage.•Device settings.25.1.1 Connections•Wi-Fi: This setting defines Wi-Fi networks. For more information, see section 23 Con-figuring Wi-Fi, page 86.•Bluetooth: This setting defines Bluetooth connectivity. For more information, see sec-tion 22 Pairing Bluetooth devices, page 85.25.1.2 Camera temperature rangeFor accurate temperature measurements, you must change the Camera temperaturerange setting to suit the expected temperature of the object you are inspecting.Available temperature range options are dependent on the camera model. The unit (℃or ℉) depends on the temperature unit setting, see section 25.1.4 Device settings, page90.25.1.3 Save options & storage•Preview image before saving: This setting defines if a preview image will be displayedbefore the image is saved.•Add annotation after saving: This setting defines if an annotation tool will be displayedwhen the image has been saved. Available options are:◦Save: No annotation tool will be displayed.◦Save & add note: The note annotation tool will be displayed.◦Save & add table: The table annotation tool will be displayed.◦Save & add voice annotation: The voice annotation tool will be displayed.◦Save & add sketch: The sketch annotation tool will be displayed.◦Save & add any annotation: The annotation tool menu will be displayed.•Image resolution: This setting defines the resolution of the images captured by thecamera. Available options are Normal and UltraMax. For more information, see sec-tion 12.1.4 About UltraMax, page 42.•Video compression: This setting defines the storage format for video clips. Availableoptions are:#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 89
Changing settings25◦Mpeg (*.mpeg): MPEG recordings cannot be edited after the file has been saved.◦Radiometric storage (*.csq): A CSQ file supports full radiometry but is only sup-ported by FLIR Systems software. The file does not include any visual image infor-mation. With this setting, only the image modes Thermal and Macro are supportedwhen recording video.•Photo as separate JPEG: For the Thermal MSX,Thermal, and Picture in picture im-age modes, a visual image is always saved in the same JPEG file as the thermal im-age. Enabling this setting saves an extra low-resolution visual image as a separateJPEG file.•Digital camera: This setting is used to turn on/off the digital camera. When the digitalcamera is off, the images modes Thermal MSX and Picture in picture are disabled.•Measure distance: This setting defines if the laser distance meter will be used tomeasure the distance when an image is saved. With this setting, the Object distanceparameter (see section 16.5 Changing the measurement parameters, page 64) in theimage data is automatically updated with the measured distance when an image issaved. (There is no effect on the Object distance setting in live mode.)•File naming format: This setting defines the naming format for new image/video files.The setting has no impact on already saved files in the archive. Available options are:◦DCF: DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) is a standard that specifies thenaming method of image files (and much more). With this setting, the name of asaved image/video file will be FLIRxxxx, where xxxx is an incremental counter. Ex-ample: FLIR0001.◦Date prefix: A prefix will be added to the filename, including the date and the text“IR_” for images and “MOV_” for videos. Examples: IR_2015-04-22_0002 andMOV_2015-04-22_0003. The date format will follow the Date & time format setting,see section 25.1.4 Device settings, page 90.Note With the Date prefix setting, the files may not automatically be detected bythird-party applications.•Delete all saved files...: This displays a dialog box where you can choose to perma-nently delete all the saved files (images and videos) from the memory card or to can-cel the delete action.25.1.4 Device settings•Language, time & units: This submenu includes settings for a number of regionalparameters:◦Language.◦Temperature unit.◦Distance unit.◦Time zone.◦Date & time.◦Date & time format.•Focus: This submenu includes the following settings:◦Autofocus: When autofocusing, the infrared camera can use one of the followingfocus methods:–Contrast: The focus is based on maximizing the image contrast.–Laser: The focus is based on a laser distance measurement. The laser is onwhen the camera is autofocusing.◦Continuous autofocus: This setting is used to enable/disable continuous autofocus.•Display settings: This submenu includes the following settings:◦Screen rotation: This setting defines if the orientation of the overlay graphics willchange according to how you hold the camera.Note You can also enable/disable screen rotation on the swipe-down menu. Formore information, see section 9.5 Swipe-down menu, page 24.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 90
Changing settings25◦Image overlay information: This setting specifies what image information the cam-era will display as an overlay on the image. For more information, see section 9.6Image overlay information, page 24. You can select the following information todisplay:–Date & time.–Emissivity.–Reflected temperature.–Distance.–Relative humidity.–Atmospheric temperature.Note This setting only specifies what information to overlay on the image. All im-age information is always saved to the image file and is available in the imagearchive.◦Screen brightness: The screen brightness slider is used to control the brightnessof the screen.Note You can also control the screen brightness on the swipe-down menu. Formore information, see section 9.5 Swipe-down menu, page 24.•Geolocation: This submenu includes the following settings:◦GPS: This setting is used to enable/disable the GPS.•Lamp & laser: This submenu includes the following settings:◦Enable lamp & laser: This setting is used to enable the camera lamp and the laser.◦Enable lamp & laser + Use lamp as flash: This setting is used to enable the flashfunction. When the flash function is enabled, the camera lamp will flash when animage is saved.◦Disable all: This setting is used to disable the camera lamp, laser, and flashfunction.•Auto power off: This setting defines how soon the camera is automatically turned off.Available choices are Off,5 min, and 20 min.•User interface options: This submenu includes the following settings:◦Manual adjustment mode: This setting specifies the type of manual image adjust-ment mode. Available options are Level, Max, Min and Level, Span. For more infor-mation, see section 14.3 Adjusting the infrared image, page 51.◦Emissivity mode: This setting specifies how the measurement parameter emissivitywill be entered. Available options are Select values and Select from materials table.For more information, see section 14.6 Changing the measurement parameters,page 57.◦Screening mode: This setting is used to enable/disable screening mode. For moreinformation, see section 21 Screening alarm, page 83.•Volume: The volume slider is used to control the volume of the built-in speaker.•Reset options: This submenu includes the following settings:◦Reset default camera mode...: This setting will affect the image mode, color palette,measurement tools, and measurement parameters. Saved images will not beaffected.◦Reset device settings to factory default...: This setting will affect all camera settings,including regional settings. Saved images will not be affected. The camera will berestarted and you will be prompted to set the regional settings.◦Reset image counter...: This setting will reset the numbering of the image file-names. To prevent image files being overwritten, the new counter value will bebased on the highest existing filename number in the image archive.Note When a reset option is selected, a dialog box is displayed with more informa-tion. You can choose to execute the reset action or to cancel.•Camera information: This submenu displays information about the camera. Nochanges can be made.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 91
Changing settings25◦Model.◦Serial number.◦Part number.◦Software: The version of the software.◦Storage: The used and free space on the memory card.◦Lens: The field of view of the lens.◦Battery: The remaining battery capacity (in percent).◦Register camera...: This will start the registration wizard. For more information, seesection 6 Register the camera, page 11.◦Licenses: Open-source license information.•Regulatory: Displays regulatory information about the camera. No changes can bemade.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 92
Cleaning the camera2626.1 Camera housing, cables, and other items26.1.1 LiquidsUse one of these liquids:• Warm water• A weak detergent solution26.1.2 EquipmentA soft cloth26.1.3 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Soak the cloth in the liquid.2. Twist the cloth to remove excess liquid.3. Clean the part with the cloth.CAUTIONDo not apply solvents or similar liquids to the camera, the cables, or other items. This can causedamage.26.2 Infrared lens26.2.1 LiquidsUse one of these liquids:• A commercial lens cleaning liquid with more than 30% isopropyl alcohol.• 96% ethyl alcohol (C2H5OH).26.2.2 EquipmentCotton woolCAUTIONIf you use a lens cleaning cloth it must be dry. Do not use a lens cleaning cloth with the liquids that aregiven in section 26.2.1 above. These liquids can cause material on the lens cleaning cloth to becomeloose. This material can have an unwanted effect on the surface of the lens.26.2.3 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Soak the cotton wool in the liquid.2. Twist the cotton wool to remove excess liquid.3. Clean the lens one time only and discard the cotton wool.WARNINGMake sure that you read all applicable MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheets) and warning labels on con-tainers before you use a liquid: the liquids can be dangerous.CAUTION• Be careful when you clean the infrared lens. The lens has a delicate anti-reflective coating.• Do not clean the infrared lens too vigorously. This can damage the anti-reflective coating.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 93
Cleaning the camera2626.3 Infrared detector26.3.1 GeneralEven small amounts of dust on the infrared detector can result in major blemishes in theimage. To remove any dust from the detector, follow the procedure below.Note• This section only applies to cameras where removing the lens exposes the infrareddetector.• In some cases the dust cannot be removed by following this procedure: the infrareddetector must be cleaned mechanically. This mechanical cleaning must be carried outby an authorized service partner.CAUTIONIn Step 2 below, do not use pressurized air from pneumatic air circuits in a workshop, etc., as this airusually contains oil mist to lubricate pneumatic tools.26.3.2 ProcedureFollow this procedure:1. Remove the lens from the camera.2. Use pressurized air from a compressed air canister to blow off the dust.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 94
Technical data27Table of contents27.1 Online field-of-view calculator........................................................... 9527.2 Note about technical data................................................................. 9527.3 Note about authoritative versions...................................................... 9527.4 FLIR T530 24°..................................................................................9627.5 FLIR T530 42°................................................................................ 10227.6 FLIR T530 24° + 14°........................................................................ 10827.7 FLIR T530 24° + 42°........................................................................ 11427.8 FLIR T530 24° + 14° & 42°................................................................ 12027.9 FLIR T530 42° + 14°........................................................................ 12627.10 FLIR T540 24°................................................................................ 13227.11 FLIR T540 42°................................................................................ 13827.12 FLIR T540 24° + 14°........................................................................ 14427.13 FLIR T540 24° + 42°........................................................................ 15027.14 FLIR T540 24° + 14° & 42°................................................................ 15627.15 FLIR T540 42° + 14°........................................................................ 16227.1 Online field-of-view calculatorPlease visit http://support.flir.com and click the photo of the camera series for field-of-view tables for all lens–camera combinations.27.2 Note about technical dataFLIR Systems reserves the right to change specifications at any time without prior notice.Please check http://support.flir.com for latest changes.27.3 Note about authoritative versionsThe authoritative version of this publication is English. In the event of divergences due totranslation errors, the English text has precedence.Any late changes are first implemented in English.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 95
Technical data2727.4 FLIR T530 24°P/N: 79302-0101Rev.: 42536Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 320 × 240 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 103 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 2.41 mrad/pixel, 42°• 1.31 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.75 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 42°• 14°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–4× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 96
Technical data27Image presentationAspect ratio 4:3Auto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• Optional: 300–1200°C (572–2200°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 97
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 98
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 99
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558012925UPC-12 845188014612Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger• T199610; Battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 100
Technical data27• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T199616; High temperature option, +300 to +1200°C• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 101
Technical data2727.5 FLIR T530 42°P/N: 79303-0101Rev.: 42537Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 320 × 240 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 103 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 2.41 mrad/pixel, 42°• 1.31 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.75 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 24°• 14°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–4× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 102
Technical data27Image presentationAspect ratio 4:3Auto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• Optional: 300–1200°C (572–2200°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 103
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 104
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 105
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558012932UPC-12 845188014629Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger• T199610; Battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 106
Technical data27• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T199616; High temperature option, +300 to +1200°C• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 107
Technical data2727.6 FLIR T530 24° + 14°P/N: 79304-0101Rev.: 42538Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 320 × 240 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 103 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 2.41 mrad/pixel, 42°• 1.31 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.75 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 42°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–4× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24Aspect ratio 4:3#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 108
Technical data27Image presentationAuto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• Optional: 300–1200°C (572–2200°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 109
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 110
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 111
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Extra lens, 14°• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558012949UPC-12 845188014636Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 112
Technical data27• T199610; Battery charger• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T199616; High temperature option, +300 to +1200°C• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 113
Technical data2727.7 FLIR T530 24° + 42°P/N: 79305-0101Rev.: 42539Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 320 × 240 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 103 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 2.41 mrad/pixel, 42°• 1.31 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.75 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 14°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–4× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24Aspect ratio 4:3#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 114
Technical data27Image presentationAuto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• Optional: 300–1200°C (572–2200°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 115
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 116
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 117
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Extra lens, 42°• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558012956UPC-12 845188014643Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 118
Technical data27• T199610; Battery charger• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T199616; High temperature option, +300 to +1200°C• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 119
Technical data2727.8 FLIR T530 24° + 14° & 42°P/N: 79306-0101Rev.: 42540Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 320 × 240 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 103 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 2.41 mrad/pixel, 42°• 1.31 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.75 mrad/pixel, 14°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–4× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24Aspect ratio 4:3Auto-rotation Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 120
Technical data27Image presentationTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• Optional: 300–1200°C (572–2200°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 121
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 122
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 123
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Extra lens, 14°• Extra lens, 42°• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558012963UPC-12 845188014650Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 124
Technical data27• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger• T199610; Battery charger• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T199616; High temperature option, +300 to +1200°C• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 125
Technical data2727.9 FLIR T530 42° + 14°P/N: 79307-0101Rev.: 42541Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 320 × 240 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 103 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 2.41 mrad/pixel, 42°• 1.31 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.75 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 24°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–4× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24Aspect ratio 4:3#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 126
Technical data27Image presentationAuto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• Optional: 300–1200°C (572–2200°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 127
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed:IR, MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 128
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 129
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Extra lens, 14°• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 4743254003255UPC-12 845188014711Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 130
Technical data27• T199610; Battery charger• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T199616; High temperature option, +300 to +1200°C• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 131
Technical data2727.10 FLIR T540 24°P/N: 79302-0201Rev.: 42542Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 464 × 348 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 71 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 1.66 mrad/pixel, 42°• 0.90 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.52 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 42°• 14°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–6× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 132
Technical data27Image presentationAspect ratio 4:3Auto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• 300–1500°C (572–2732°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 133
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 134
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 135
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558012970UPC-12 845188014667Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger• T199610; Battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 136
Technical data27• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 137
Technical data2727.11 FLIR T540 42°P/N: 79303-0201Rev.: 42543Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 464 × 348 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 71 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 1.66 mrad/pixel, 42°• 0.90 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.52 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 24°• 14°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–6× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 138
Technical data27Image presentationAspect ratio 4:3Auto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• 300–1500°C (572–2732°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 139
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 140
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 141
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558012987UPC-12 845188014674Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger• T199610; Battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 142
Technical data27• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 143
Technical data2727.12 FLIR T540 24° + 14°P/N: 79304-0201Rev.: 42544Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 464 × 348 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 71 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 1.66 mrad/pixel, 42°• 0.90 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.52 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 42°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–6× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24Aspect ratio 4:3#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 144
Technical data27Image presentationAuto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• 300–1500°C (572–2732°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 145
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 146
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 147
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Extra lens, 14°• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558012994UPC-12 845188014681Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 148
Technical data27• T199610; Battery charger• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 149
Technical data2727.13 FLIR T540 24° + 42°P/N: 79305-0201Rev.: 42545Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 464 × 348 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 71 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 1.66 mrad/pixel, 42°• 0.90 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.52 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 14°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–6× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24Aspect ratio 4:3#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 150
Technical data27Image presentationAuto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• 300–1500°C (572–2732°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 151
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 152
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 153
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Extra lens, 42°• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558013007UPC-12 845188014698Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 154
Technical data27• T199610; Battery charger• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 155
Technical data2727.14 FLIR T540 24° + 14° & 42°P/N: 79306-0201Rev.: 42546Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 464 × 348 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 71 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 1.66 mrad/pixel, 42°• 0.90 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.52 mrad/pixel, 14°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–6× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24Aspect ratio 4:3Auto-rotation Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 156
Technical data27Image presentationTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• 300–1500°C (572–2732°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 157
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed: IR,MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 158
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 159
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Extra lens, 14°• Extra lens, 42°• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 7332558013014UPC-12 845188014704Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 160
Technical data27• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger• T199610; Battery charger• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 161
Technical data2727.15 FLIR T540 42° + 14°P/N: 79307-0201Rev.: 42547Imaging and optical dataInfrared resolution 464 × 348 pixelsUltraMax (super-resolution) In FLIR ToolsNETD • <30 mK, 42° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <40 mK, 24° @ +30°C (+86°F)• <50 mK, 14° @ +30°C (+86°F)Field of view • 42° × 32°• 24° × 18°• 14° × 10°Minimum focus distance • 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 42°• 0.15 m (0.49 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°• Macro mode 71 µm as option to 24°Minimum focus distance with MSX • 0.65 m (2.13 ft.), 42°• 0.5 m (1.64 ft.), 24°• 1.0 m (3.28 ft.), 14°Focal length • 10 mm (0.39 in.), 42°• 17 mm (0.67 in.), 24°• 29 mm (1.41 in.), 14°Spatial resolution (IFOV) • 1.66 mrad/pixel, 42°• 0.90 mrad/pixel, 24°• 0.52 mrad/pixel, 14°Available extra lenses • 24°Lens identification Automaticf number • 1.1, 42°• 1.3, 24°• 1.5, 14°Image frequency 30 HzFocus • Continuous LDM• One-shot LDM• One-shot contrast• ManualField of view match YesDigital zoom 1–6× continuousDetector dataFocal plane array/spectral range Uncooled microbolometer/7.5–14 µmDetector pitch 17 µmImage presentationResolution 640 × 480 pixels (VGA)Surface brightness (cd/m2)400Screen size 4 in.Viewing angle 80°Color depth (bits) 24Aspect ratio 4:3#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 162
Technical data27Image presentationAuto-rotation YesTouchscreen Optically bonded PCAPDisplay technology IPSCover glass material Dragontrail®Programmable buttons 2Viewfinder NoImage adjustment • Automatic• Automatic maximum• Automatic minimum• ManualImage presentation modesInfrared image YesVisual image YesMSX YesPicture in picture Resizable and movableGallery YesMeasurementObject temperature range • –20 to +120°C (–4 to +248°F)• 0–650°C (32–1202°F)• 300–1500°C (572–2732°F)Accuracy ±2°C (±3.6°F) or ±2% of reading, for ambient tem-perature 15–35°C (59–95°F) and object tempera-ture above 0°C (32°F)Measurement analysisSpotmeter 3 in live modeArea 3 in live modeAutomatic hot/cold detection Automatic maximum/minimum markers withinareaColor alarm (Isotherm) • Above• Below• Interval• Condensation• InsulationMeasurement presets • No measurements• Center spot• Hot spot• Cold spot• User preset 1• User preset 2Difference temperature YesReference temperature YesEmissivity correction Yes, variable from 0.01 to 1.0 or selected frommaterials listMeasurement corrections YesExternal optics/windows correction YesScreening 0.5°C (0.9°F) accuracy at 37°C (98.6°F) withreference#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 163
Technical data27AlarmMoisture alarm YesInsulation alarm YesMeasurement alarm Audible/visual alarms above/belowSet-upColor palettes • Iron• Gray• Rainbow• Arctic• Lava• Rainbow HCSetup commands Local adaptation of units, language, date, andtime formatsLanguages 21Service functionsCamera software update Use PC software FLIR ToolsStorage of imagesStorage media Removable memory: SD cardTime lapse (Periodic image storage) 10 seconds to 24 hours (infrared)Remote control operation • Using FLIR Tools (using USB cable)• FLIR Tools Mobile (over Wi-Fi)Image file format Standard JPEG, measurement data included. In-frared-only modeImage annotationsVoice 60 seconds with built-in microphone and speaker(and via Bluetooth) on still images and videoText Text from predefined list or soft keyboard ontouchscreenVisual image annotation YesImage sketch Yes: on infrared onlySketch From touchscreenMETERLiNK Yes, several readingsArea measurement information YesGPS Location data automatically added to every stillimage and first frame in video from built-in GPSVideo recording in cameraRadiometric infrared-video recording RTRR (.csq)Non-radiometric infrared-video recording H.264 to memory cardVisual video recording H.264 to memory cardVideo streamingRadiometric infrared-video streaming(compressed)Over UVC or RTSP (Wi-Fi)Non-radiometric video streaming (compressed:IR, MSX, visual, Picture in Picture) • H.264 (AVC) over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MPEG4 over RTSP (Wi-Fi)• MJPEG over UVC and RTSP (Wi-Fi)Visual video streaming Yes#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 164
Technical data27Digital cameraResolution 5 MP with LED lightFocus FixedField of view 53° × 41°Video lamp Built-in LED lightLaser pointerLaser alignment Position is automatically displayed on the infraredimageLaser distance meter Activated by dedicated buttonLaser Class 2, 0.05–40 m (1.6–130 ft.) ±1% of meas-ured distanceData communication interfacesInterfaces USB 2.0, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi, DisplayPortBluetooth Communication with headset and externalsensorsWi-Fi Peer to peer (ad hoc) or infrastructure (network)Audio Microphone and speaker for voice annotation ofimagesUSB USB Type-C: data transfer/video/powerUSB standard USB 2.0 High SpeedVideo out DisplayPortVideo connector type DisplayPort over USB Type-CPower systemBattery type Rechargeable Li-ion batteryBattery voltage 3.6 VBattery operating time > 4 hours at 25°C (68°F) with typical useCharging system In camera (AC adapter or 12 V from a vehicle) ortwo-bay chargerCharging time (using two-bay charger) 3.5 h to 90% capacity, on-screen indicatorExternal power operation AC adapter 90–260 V AC (50/60 Hz) or 12 V froma vehicle (cable with standard plug, optional)Power management Automatic shut-down and sleep modeEnvironmental dataOperating temperature range –15 to +50°C (5–122°F)Storage temperature range –40 to +70°C (–40 to 158°F)Humidity (operating and storage) IEC 60068-2-30/24 hours, 95% relative humidity,25–40°C (77–104°F)/2 cyclesEMC • ETSI EN 301 489-1 (radio)• ETSI EN 301 489-17• EN 61000-6-2 (immunity)• EN 61000-6-3 (emission)• FCC 47 CFR Part 15 Class B (emission)Radio spectrum • ETSI EN 300 228• FCC Part 15.249• RSS-247Encapsulation IP 54 (IEC 60529)Shock 25g (IEC 60068-2-27)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 165
Technical data27Environmental dataVibration 2g (IEC 60068-2-6)Safety EN/UL/CSA/PSE 60950-1Physical dataWeight (including battery) 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)Size (L × W × H) • Lens vertical: 140 × 201.3 × 84.1 mm (5.5 ×7.9 × 3.3 in.)• Lens horisontal: 140 × 201.3 × 167.3 mm (5.5× 7.9 × 6.6 in.)Battery weight 195 g (6.89 oz.)Battery size (L × W × H) 59 × 66 × 94 mm (2.3 × 2.6 × 3.7 in.)Tripod mounting UNC ¼″-20Housing material PCABS with TPE, magnesiumColor BlackWarranty and serviceWarranty http://www.flir.com/warranty/Shipping informationPackaging, type Cardboard boxPackaging, contents • Accessory box I:◦ Power supply for battery charger◦ Power supply, 15 W/3 A◦ Printed documentation◦ SD card (8 GB)◦ USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 1.0 m◦ USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standardspecification UH311◦ USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB2.0 standard), 1.0 m• Accessory box II:◦ Lanyard strap, battery charger◦ Lens cap strap◦ Lens cleaning cloth◦ Neck strap• Battery (2 ea)• Battery charger• Extra lens, 14°• Hard transport case• Infrared camera with lens• Lens cap, front• Lens cap, front and rear (only for extra lenses)Packaging, weightPackaging, size 500 × 190 × 370 mm (19.7 × 7.5 × 14.6 in.)EAN-13 4743254003316UPC-12 845188014728Country of origin Sweden and/or EstoniaSupplies and accessories:• T198495; Pouch for FLIR T6xx and T4xx series• T911705ACC; USB Type-C to USB Type-C cable (USB 2.0 standard), 1.0 m• T911632ACC; USB Type-C to HDMI adapter, standard specification UH311• T911631ACC; USB 2.0 A to USB Type-C cable, 0.9 m• T911630ACC; Power supply for camera, 15 W/3 A• T911633ACC; Power supply for battery charger#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 166
Technical data27• T199610; Battery charger• T199300ACC; Battery• T199601; Hand strap and neck strap• T199347ACC; Hard transport case• T198583; FLIR Tools+ (download card incl. license key)#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 167
Mechanical drawings28[See next page]#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 168
 0.98in25mm   4.7in119.4mm  5.51in140mm  1.52in38.5mm  6.41in162.8mm UNC ¼” -20Optical axis2.7in68.7mm 1.43in36.2mm   1.89in47.9mm Optical axis 0.98in25mm  1.89in47.9mm  4.7in119.4mm  4.53in115mm  1.89in47.9mm  1.42in36mm  1.42in36.1mm Optical axisCamera housingSheetDrawing No.SizeCheckDrawn byDenominationA31(3)T129991Basic dimensions FLIR T5xx-2017-02-17R&D InstrumentsModified12345678910ABCDEFGH1 32 54CFBDGEA6RevA1:2Scale© 2016, FLIR Systems, Inc. All rights reserved worldwide. No part of this drawing may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without written permission from FLIR Systems, Inc. Specifications subject to change without further notice. Dimensional data is based on nominal values. Products may be subject to regional market considerations. License procedures may apply. Product may be subject to US Export Regulations. Please refer to exportquestions@flir.com with any questions. Diversion contrary to US law is prohibited.
 4.84in122.9mm  2.83in72mm  1.68in42.8mm  1.79in45.4mm  0.73in18.7mm For additional dimensions see page 1Camera with Lens IR f=17mm (24°)Camera with Lens IR f=10mm (42°)Camera with Lens IR f=29mm (14°)SheetDrawing No.SizeCheckDrawn byDenominationA32(3)T129991Basic dimensions FLIR T5xx-2017-02-17R&D InstrumentsModified12345678910ABCDEFGH1 32 54CFBDGEA6RevA1:5Scale© 2016, FLIR Systems, Inc. All rights reserved worldwide. No part of this drawing may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without written permission from FLIR Systems, Inc. Specifications subject to change without further notice. Dimensional data is based on nominal values. Products may be subject to regional market considerations. License procedures may apply. Product may be subject to US Export Regulations. Please refer to exportquestions@flir.com with any questions. Diversion contrary to US law is prohibited.
 1.57in39.8mm  3.7in94mm  2.33in59.2mm  1.47in37.3mm  2.6in65.9mm  4.24in107.7mm  3.77in95.7mm  2.93in74.5mm  5.74in145.9mm Battery ChargerSheetDrawing No.SizeCheckDrawn byDenominationA33(3)T129991Basic dimensions FLIR T5xx-2017-02-17R&D InstrumentsModified12345678910ABCDEFGH1 32 54CFBDGEA6RevA1:5Scale© 2016, FLIR Systems, Inc. All rights reserved worldwide. No part of this drawing may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without written permission from FLIR Systems, Inc. Specifications subject to change without further notice. Dimensional data is based on nominal values. Products may be subject to regional market considerations. License procedures may apply. Product may be subject to US Export Regulations. Please refer to exportquestions@flir.com with any questions. Diversion contrary to US law is prohibited.
Application examples2929.1 Moisture & water damage29.1.1 GeneralIt is often possible to detect moisture and water damage in a house by using an infraredcamera. This is partly because the damaged area has a different heat conduction prop-erty and partly because it has a different thermal capacity to store heat than the sur-rounding material.Many factors can come into play as to how moisture or water damage will appear in aninfrared image.For example, heating and cooling of these parts takes place at different rates dependingon the material and the time of day. For this reason, it is important that other methods areused as well to check for moisture or water damage.29.1.2 FigureThe image below shows extensive water damage on an external wall where the waterhas penetrated the outer facing because of an incorrectly installed window ledge.29.2 Faulty contact in socket29.2.1 GeneralDepending on the type of connection a socket has, an improperly connected wire can re-sult in local temperature increase. This temperature increase is caused by the reducedcontact area between the connection point of the incoming wire and the socket , and canresult in an electrical fire.A socket’s construction may differ dramatically from one manufacturer to another. Forthis reason, different faults in a socket can lead to the same typical appearance in an in-frared image.Local temperature increase can also result from improper contact between wire andsocket, or from difference in load.29.2.2 FigureThe image below shows a connection of a cable to a socket where improper contact inthe connection has resulted in local temperature increase.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 172
Application examples2929.3 Oxidized socket29.3.1 GeneralDepending on the type of socket and the environment in which the socket is installed, ox-ides may occur on the socket's contact surfaces. These oxides can lead to locally in-creased resistance when the socket is loaded, which can be seen in an infrared imageas local temperature increase.A socket’s construction may differ dramatically from one manufacturer to another. Forthis reason, different faults in a socket can lead to the same typical appearance in an in-frared image.Local temperature increase can also result from improper contact between a wire andsocket, or from difference in load.29.3.2 FigureThe image below shows a series of fuses where one fuse has a raised temperature onthe contact surfaces against the fuse holder. Because of the fuse holder’s blank metal,the temperature increase is not visible there, while it is visible on the fuse’s ceramicmaterial.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 173
Application examples2929.4 Insulation deficiencies29.4.1 GeneralInsulation deficiencies may result from insulation losing volume over the course of timeand thereby not entirely filling the cavity in a frame wall.An infrared camera allows you to see these insulation deficiencies because they eitherhave a different heat conduction property than sections with correctly installed insulation,and/or show the area where air is penetrating the frame of the building.When you are inspecting a building, the temperature difference between the inside andoutside should be at least 10°C (18°F). Studs, water pipes, concrete columns, and simi-lar components may resemble an insulation deficiency in an infrared image. Minor differ-ences may also occur naturally.29.4.2 FigureIn the image below, insulation in the roof framing is lacking. Due to the absence of insula-tion, air has forced its way into the roof structure, which thus takes on a different charac-teristic appearance in the infrared image.29.5 Draft29.5.1 GeneralDraft can be found under baseboards, around door and window casings, and above ceil-ing trim. This type of draft is often possible to see with an infrared camera, as a coolerairstream cools down the surrounding surface.When you are investigating draft in a house, there should be sub-atmospheric pressurein the house. Close all doors, windows, and ventilation ducts, and allow the kitchen fanto run for a while before you take the infrared images.An infrared image of draft often shows a typical stream pattern. You can see this streampattern clearly in the picture below.Also keep in mind that drafts can be concealed by heat from floor heating circuits.29.5.2 FigureThe image below shows a ceiling hatch where faulty installation has resulted in a strongdraft.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 174
Application examples29#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 175
About FLIR Systems30FLIR Systems was established in 1978 to pioneer the development of high-performanceinfrared imaging systems, and is the world leader in the design, manufacture, and mar-keting of thermal imaging systems for a wide variety of commercial, industrial, and gov-ernment applications. Today, FLIR Systems embraces five major companies withoutstanding achievements in infrared technology since 1958—the Swedish AGEMA In-frared Systems (formerly AGA Infrared Systems), the three United States companies In-digo Systems, FSI, and Inframetrics, and the French company Cedip.Since 2007, FLIR Systems has acquired several companies with world-leading expertisein sensor technologies:• Extech Instruments (2007)• Ifara Tecnologías (2008)• Salvador Imaging (2009)• OmniTech Partners (2009)• Directed Perception (2009)• Raymarine (2010)• ICx Technologies (2010)• TackTick Marine Digital Instruments (2011)• Aerius Photonics (2011)• Lorex Technology (2012)• Traficon (2012)• MARSS (2013)• DigitalOptics micro-optics business (2013)• DVTEL (2015)• Point Grey Research (2016)• Prox Dynamics (2016)Figure 30.1 Patent documents from the early 1960sFLIR Systems has three manufacturing plants in the United States (Portland, OR, Boston,MA, Santa Barbara, CA) and one in Sweden (Stockholm). Since 2007 there is also amanufacturing plant in Tallinn, Estonia. Direct sales offices in Belgium, Brazil, China,France, Germany, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Italy, Japan, Korea, Sweden, and the USA—together with a worldwide network of agents and distributors—support our internation-al customer base.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 176
About FLIR Systems30FLIR Systems is at the forefront of innovation in the infrared camera industry. We antici-pate market demand by constantly improving our existing cameras and developing newones. The company has set milestones in product design and development such as theintroduction of the first battery-operated portable camera for industrial inspections, andthe first uncooled infrared camera, to mention just two innovations.Figure 30.2 1969: Thermovision Model 661. Thecamera weighed approximately 25 kg (55 lb.), theoscilloscope 20 kg (44 lb.), and the tripod 15 kg(33 lb.). The operator also needed a 220 VACgenerator set, and a 10 L (2.6 US gallon) jar withliquid nitrogen. To the left of the oscilloscope thePolaroid attachment (6 kg/13 lb.) can be seen.Figure 30.3 2015: FLIR One, an accessory toiPhone and Android mobile phones. Weight: 90 g(3.2 oz.).FLIR Systems manufactures all vital mechanical and electronic components of the cam-era systems itself. From detector design and manufacturing, to lenses and system elec-tronics, to final testing and calibration, all production steps are carried out andsupervised by our own engineers. The in-depth expertise of these infrared specialists en-sures the accuracy and reliability of all vital components that are assembled into your in-frared camera.30.1 More than just an infrared cameraAt FLIR Systems we recognize that our job is to go beyond just producing the best infra-red camera systems. We are committed to enabling all users of our infrared camera sys-tems to work more productively by providing them with the most powerful camera–software combination. Especially tailored software for predictive maintenance, R & D,and process monitoring is developed in-house. Most software is available in a wide varie-ty of languages.We support all our infrared cameras with a wide variety of accessories to adapt yourequipment to the most demanding infrared applications.30.2 Sharing our knowledgeAlthough our cameras are designed to be very user-friendly, there is a lot more to ther-mography than just knowing how to handle a camera. Therefore, FLIR Systems hasfounded the Infrared Training Center (ITC), a separate business unit, that provides certi-fied training courses. Attending one of the ITC courses will give you a truly hands-onlearning experience.The staff of the ITC are also there to provide you with any application support you mayneed in putting infrared theory into practice.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 177
About FLIR Systems3030.3 Supporting our customersFLIR Systems operates a worldwide service network to keep your camera running at alltimes. If you discover a problem with your camera, local service centers have all theequipment and expertise to solve it within the shortest possible time. Therefore, there isno need to send your camera to the other side of the world or to talk to someone whodoes not speak your language.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 178
Terms, laws, and definitions31Term DefinitionAbsorption and emission3The capacity or ability of an object to absorb incident radi-ated energy is always the same as the capacity to emit itsown energy as radiationApparent temperature uncompensated reading from an infrared instrument, con-taining all radiation incident on the instrument, regardless ofits sources4Color palette assigns different colors to indicate specific levels of apparenttemperature. Palettes can provide high or low contrast, de-pending on the colors used in themConduction direct transfer of thermal energy from molecule to molecule,caused by collisions between the moleculesConvection heat transfer mode where a fluid is brought into motion, ei-ther by gravity or another force, thereby transferring heatfrom one place to anotherDiagnostics examination of symptoms and syndromes to determine thenature of faults or failures5Direction of heat transfer6Heat will spontaneously flow from hotter to colder, therebytransferring thermal energy from one place to another7Emissivity ratio of the power radiated by real bodies to the power that isradiated by a blackbody at the same temperature and at thesame wavelength8Energy conservation9The sum of the total energy contents in a closed system isconstantExitant radiation radiation that leaves the surface of an object, regardless ofits original sourcesHeat thermal energy that is transferred between two objects (sys-tems) due to their difference in temperatureHeat transfer rate10 The heat transfer rate under steady state conditions is di-rectly proportional to the thermal conductivity of the object,the cross-sectional area of the object through which the heatflows, and the temperature difference between the two endsof the object. It is inversely proportional to the length, orthickness, of the object11Incident radiation radiation that strikes an object from its surroundingsIR thermography process of acquisition and analysis of thermal informationfrom non-contact thermal imaging devicesIsotherm replaces certain colors in the scale with a contrasting color. Itmarks an interval of equal apparent temperature12Qualitative thermography thermography that relies on the analysis of thermal patternsto reveal the existence of and to locate the position ofanomalies13Quantitative thermography thermography that uses temperature measurement to deter-mine the seriousness of an anomaly, in order to establish re-pair priorities13#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 1793. Kirchhoff’s law of thermal radiation.4. Based on ISO 18434-1:2008 (en).5. Based on ISO 13372:2004 (en).6. 2nd law of thermodynamics.7. This is a consequence of the 2nd law of thermodynamics, the law itself is more complicated.8. Based on ISO 16714-3:2016 (en).9. 1st law of thermodynamics.10.Fourier’s law.11.This is the one-dimensional form of Fourier’s law, valid for steady-state conditions.12.Based on ISO 18434-1:2008 (en)13.Based on ISO 10878-2013 (en).
Terms, laws, and definitions31Term DefinitionRadiative heat transfer Heat transfer by the emission and absorption of thermalradiationReflected apparent temperature apparent temperature of the environment that is reflected bythe target into the IR camera14Spatial resolution ability of an IR camera to resolve small objects or detailsTemperature measure of the average kinetic energy of the molecules andatoms that make up the substanceThermal energy total kinetic energy of the molecules that make up theobject15Thermal gradient gradual change in temperature over distance14Thermal tuning process of putting the colors of the image on the object ofanalysis, in order to maximize contrast#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 18014.Based on ISO 16714-3:2016 (en).15.Thermal energy is part of the internal energy of an object.
Thermographic measurementtechniques3232.1 IntroductionAn infrared camera measures and images the emitted infrared radiation from an object.The fact that radiation is a function of object surface temperature makes it possible forthe camera to calculate and display this temperature.However, the radiation measured by the camera does not only depend on the tempera-ture of the object but is also a function of the emissivity. Radiation also originates fromthe surroundings and is reflected in the object. The radiation from the object and the re-flected radiation will also be influenced by the absorption of the atmosphere.To measure temperature accurately, it is therefore necessary to compensate for the ef-fects of a number of different radiation sources. This is done on-line automatically by thecamera. The following object parameters must, however, be supplied for the camera:• The emissivity of the object• The reflected apparent temperature• The distance between the object and the camera• The relative humidity• Temperature of the atmosphere32.2 EmissivityThe most important object parameter to set correctly is the emissivity which, in short, is ameasure of how much radiation is emitted from the object, compared to that from a per-fect blackbody of the same temperature.Normally, object materials and surface treatments exhibit emissivity ranging from approx-imately 0.1 to 0.95. A highly polished (mirror) surface falls below 0.1, while an oxidizedor painted surface has a higher emissivity. Oil-based paint, regardless of color in the visi-ble spectrum, has an emissivity over 0.9 in the infrared. Human skin exhibits an emissiv-ity 0.97 to 0.98.Non-oxidized metals represent an extreme case of perfect opacity and high reflexivity,which does not vary greatly with wavelength. Consequently, the emissivity of metals islow – only increasing with temperature. For non-metals, emissivity tends to be high, anddecreases with temperature.32.2.1 Finding the emissivity of a sample32.2.1.1 Step 1: Determining reflected apparent temperatureUse one of the following two methods to determine reflected apparent temperature:#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 181
Thermographic measurement techniques3232.2.1.1.1 Method 1: Direct methodFollow this procedure:1. Look for possible reflection sources, considering that the incident angle = reflectionangle (a = b).Figure 32.1 1 = Reflection source2. If the reflection source is a spot source, modify the source by obstructing it using apiece if cardboard.Figure 32.2 1 = Reflection source#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 182
Thermographic measurement techniques323. Measure the radiation intensity (= apparent temperature) from the reflection sourceusing the following settings:• Emissivity: 1.0• Dobj: 0You can measure the radiation intensity using one of the following two methods:Figure 32.3 1 = Reflection source Figure 32.4 1 = Reflection sourceYou can not use a thermocouple to measure reflected apparent temperature, because athermocouple measures temperature, but apparent temperatrure is radiation intensity.32.2.1.1.2 Method 2: Reflector methodFollow this procedure:1. Crumble up a large piece of aluminum foil.2. Uncrumble the aluminum foil and attach it to a piece of cardboard of the same size.3. Put the piece of cardboard in front of the object you want to measure. Make sure thatthe side with aluminum foil points to the camera.4. Set the emissivity to 1.0.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 183
Thermographic measurement techniques325. Measure the apparent temperature of the aluminum foil and write it down. The foil isconsidered a perfect reflector, so its apparent temperature equals the reflected appa-rent temperature from the surroundings.Figure 32.5 Measuring the apparent temperature of the aluminum foil.32.2.1.2 Step 2: Determining the emissivityFollow this procedure:1. Select a place to put the sample.2. Determine and set reflected apparent temperature according to the previousprocedure.3. Put a piece of electrical tape with known high emissivity on the sample.4. Heat the sample at least 20 K above room temperature. Heating must be reasonablyeven.5. Focus and auto-adjust the camera, and freeze the image.6. Adjust Level and Span for best image brightness and contrast.7. Set emissivity to that of the tape (usually 0.97).8. Measure the temperature of the tape using one of the following measurementfunctions:•Isotherm (helps you to determine both the temperature and how evenly you haveheated the sample)•Spot (simpler)•Box Avg (good for surfaces with varying emissivity).9. Write down the temperature.10. Move your measurement function to the sample surface.11. Change the emissivity setting until you read the same temperature as your previousmeasurement.12. Write down the emissivity.Note• Avoid forced convection• Look for a thermally stable surrounding that will not generate spot reflections• Use high quality tape that you know is not transparent, and has a high emissivity youare certain of• This method assumes that the temperature of your tape and the sample surface arethe same. If they are not, your emissivity measurement will be wrong.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 184
Thermographic measurement techniques3232.3 Reflected apparent temperatureThis parameter is used to compensate for the radiation reflected in the object. If theemissivity is low and the object temperature relatively far from that of the reflected it willbe important to set and compensate for the reflected apparent temperature correctly.32.4 DistanceThe distance is the distance between the object and the front lens of the camera. Thisparameter is used to compensate for the following two facts:• That radiation from the target is absorbed by the atmosphere between the object andthe camera.• That radiation from the atmosphere itself is detected by the camera.32.5 Relative humidityThe camera can also compensate for the fact that the transmittance is also dependenton the relative humidity of the atmosphere. To do this set the relative humidity to the cor-rect value. For short distances and normal humidity the relative humidity can normally beleft at a default value of 50%.32.6 Other parametersIn addition, some cameras and analysis programs from FLIR Systems allow you to com-pensate for the following parameters:• Atmospheric temperature – i.e. the temperature of the atmosphere between the cam-era and the target• External optics temperature – i.e. the temperature of any external lenses or windowsused in front of the camera• External optics transmittance – i.e. the transmission of any external lenses or windowsused in front of the camera#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 185
The secret to a good thermalimage3333.1 IntroductionThe use of thermal cameras has spread to many professional environments in recentyears. They are easy to handle, and thermal images are quick to take. Images can alsobe attached to reports easily, e.g., for an inspection of an electrical installation or buildingas evidence of work carried out or of any faults or deviations identified. However, peopleoften forget that an image to be used as evidence or even proof before the courts mustmeet certain requirements: this is not achieved with a quick snapshot. So, what charac-terizes a really good thermal image?33.2 BackgroundDuring the practical exercises in our thermography training classes we notice, time andtime again, how difficult some participants find choosing the optimal camera settings fordifferent tasks. Not everyone has a background in, for example, amateur photography(more on the difference between thermography and photography in the next section),and to take a good and meaningful thermal image you need some knowledge of photog-raphy, including its practical application. For this reason, it is hardly surprising that ther-mographers, particularly those without training, repeatedly produce reports with thermalimages that are devoid of meaning or even support the wrong conclusions and are fit on-ly for the waste bin. Unfortunately, such reports are found not only in companies in whichthermography is more of an added bonus but also in businesses where these reportsmay be part of a critical process monitoring or maintenance program. There are two mainreasons for this: either the users don't know what a good thermal image is or how to takeone, or—for whatever reason—the job is not being done properly.33.3 A good imageAs thermography and photography are related, it makes sense to take a look at what isimportant to professional photographers. How do they characterize a good image? Threeaspects can be pointed out as the most important:1. An image has to touch the observer in some way. That means it needs to be unusual,striking, or unique, and has to arouse interest and, depending on the genre, emotion.2. The composition and balance must be in harmony; the image detail and content mustgo together aesthetically.3. The lighting must be interesting, such as back lighting or side lighting that casts dra-matic shadows, or evening light or other pleasing illumination—whatever fits the over-all effect that the photographer wants.To what extent can these concepts be applied to thermography?With thermography, the motif should also be interesting. In other words, our aim is to de-pict an object or its condition. Emotions are not required—facts have priority in thermalimages (assuming they are not an art project!). In everyday working life, it is important toillustrate thermal patterns clearly and to facilitate temperature measurements.The thermal image must also have suitable image detail and display the object at an ap-propriate size and position.Without external illumination, neither visual sight nor photography is possible becausewhat we see with our eyes or capture with a camera is reflected light. In thermography,the camera records both emitted and reflected radiation. Therefore, the relationship andintensity of the infrared radiation, both emitted by the object and by the surrounding envi-ronment, are important. Brightness and contrast in the image are then adjusted bychanging the displayed temperature interval.The comparison between photography and thermography can be summarized in a tableusing a few keywords:Photography ThermographyInteresting motif The object to be examined“Tells a story” “Presents facts”#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 186
The secret to a good thermal image33Photography ThermographyAesthetically pleasing Clear heat patternsEmotive ObjectiveImage detail Image detailFocus FocusLighting Emission and reflectionBrightness BrightnessContrast ContrastAs with photography, in thermography there are countless possibilities for editing images—provided they are saved as radiometric images. However, not all settings can bechanged, and not all image errors can be corrected.33.4 The three unchangeables—the basis for a good image33.4.1 FocusA professional thermal image is always focused and sharp, and the object and heat pat-tern must be clear and easy to recognize.Figure 33.1 Only hazy “patches of heat” can be seen in the unfocused image (left). The focused image(right) clearly shows which object is being observed and where the object is warm.A blurred image not only comes across as unprofessional and makes it harder to identifythe object and any faults (see Figure 33.1) but can also lead to measurement errors (seeFigure 33.2), which are more serious the smaller the measurement object. Even if all oth-er parameters are set correctly, the measurement values from an unfocused thermal im-age are highly likely to be incorrect.Figure 33.2 Focused thermal image (left) with a maximum temperature of Tmax = 89.7°C (193.5°F) and anunfocused thermal image (right) with a maximum temperature of Tmax = 73.7°C (164.7°F).Of course, the size of the detector matrix also plays a role in image quality. Images takenby cameras with small detectors (i.e., with fewer pixels) are more blurred or “grainier”and give the impression that they are not focused (see Figure 33.3). It should also benoted that not every camera can be focused, and in this case the only means of focusingthe camera is by changing the distance from the object.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 187
The secret to a good thermal image33Figure 33.3 The same radiator from the same distance with the same settings, taken by three differentthermal cameras: FLIR C2 (left), FLIR T440 (middle), and FLIR T640 (right).33.4.2 Temperature rangeFor hand-held uncooled microbolometer cameras, the “exposure” is essentially preset bythe image frame rate. This means that it is not possible to choose for how long—andtherefore how much—radiation hits the camera detector. For this reason, an appropriatetemperature range must be selected that matches the amount of incident radiation. If atemperature range is selected that is too low, the image will be oversaturated, as objectswith higher temperatures emit more infrared radiation than colder objects. If you select atemperature range that is too high, the thermal image will be “underexposed,” as can beseen in Figure 33.4.Figure 33.4 Images from a FLIR T440 with temperature ranges of –20 to +120°C, (left, –4 to +248°F), 0 to+650°C (middle, +32 to +1202°F) and +250 to +1200°C (right, +482 to +2192°F). All other settings areunchanged.To take an image or temperature measurement, the lowest possible temperature rangeavailable on the camera should be selected. However, it must also include the highesttemperature in the image (see Figure 33.5).Figure 33.5 An image of the same object taken with different temperature ranges: –20 to 120°C (left, –4to +248°F) and 0 to 650°C (right, +32 to +1202°F). The temperature in the left image is displayed with awarning sign (a red circle with a white cross) because the measured values are outside the calibratedrange.Depending on the camera model and configuration options, overdriven and underdrivenareas can be displayed in a contrasting color.33.4.3 Image detail and distance from the objectIllumination in photography corresponds in thermography to the interplay of radiationfrom the object and reflected radiation from the surrounding environment. The latter isunwanted because interfering—or, at the very least, spot—reflections need to beavoided. This is achieved by choosing a suitable position from where to take images. It isalso advisable to select a position from which the object of interest can be seen clearlyand is not hidden. This may seem obvious but in the building sector, for example, it iscommon to find reports in which pipes or windows to be investigated are hidden behind#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 188
The secret to a good thermal image33sofas, indoor plants or curtains. Figure 33.6 illustrates this situation—which occurs alltoo regularly.Figure 33.6 “Thermographic inspection” of an inaccessible object.It is also important that the object under investigation, or its areas of interest, take up thewhole thermal image. This is particularly true when measuring the temperature of smallobjects. The spot tool must be completely filled by the object to enable correct tempera-ture measurements. Since the field of view and therefore the spot size are determined byboth the distance to the object and the camera’s optics, in such situations the distance tothe object must either be reduced (get closer!) or a telephoto lens must be used (see Fig-ure 33.7).Figure 33.7 Supply and return lines from radiators in an open-plan office. The left image was taken from adistance of 1 m: the measurement spot is filled and the temperature measurement is correct. The right im-age was taken from a distance of 3 m: the measurement spot is not completely filled and the measuredtemperature values are incorrect (31.4 and 24.4°C (88.5 and 75.9°F) instead of 33.2 and 25.9°C (91.8 and78.6°F)).33.5 The changeables—image optimization and temperature measurement33.5.1 Level and spanAfter choosing the appropriate temperature range, you can adjust the contrast andbrightness of the thermal image by changing the temperature intervals displayed. Inmanual mode, the false colors available in the palette can be assigned to the tempera-tures of the object of interest. This process is often referred to as “thermal tuning.” In au-tomatic mode, the camera selects the coldest and warmest apparent temperatures in theimage as the upper and lower limits of the temperature interval currently displayed.A good or problem-specific scaling of the thermal image is an important step in the inter-pretation of the image, and is, unfortunately, often underestimated (see Figure 33.8).#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 189
The secret to a good thermal image33Figure 33.8 A thermal image in automatic mode (left) and in manual model (right). The adjusted tempera-ture interval increases the contrast in the image and makes the faults clear.33.5.2 Palettes and isothermsPalettes represent intervals with the same apparent temperatures using different sets ofcolors. In other words, they translate specific radiation intensities into colors that are spe-cific to a particular palette. Frequently used palettes include the gray, iron, and rainbowpalettes (see Figure 33.9). Gray tones are particularly suited to resolving small geometricdetails but are less suited to displaying small differences in temperature. The iron paletteis very intuitive and also easy to understand for those without much experience in ther-mography. It offers a good balance between geometric and thermal resolution. The rain-bow palette is more colorful and alternates between light and dark colors. This results ingreater contrast, but this can lead to a noisy image for objects with different surfaces ormany temperatures.Figure 33.9 Gray, iron, and rainbow palettes (left to right).The isotherm is a measuring function that displays a given interval of the same apparenttemperature or radiation intensity in a color that is different from the palette. It allows youto emphasize temperature patterns in the image (see Figure 33.10).Figure 33.10 Foundation wall: connection between the old (left in image) and the new (right in image)parts of the building. The isotherm highlights an area of air leakage.33.5.3 Object parametersAs we have seen, the appearance of thermal images is dependent on the thermogra-pher’s technique and choice of settings, and the look of saved radiometric images canbe altered by editing. However, it is also possible to change the settings that are relevantfor the calculation of temperatures. In practice, this means that the emissivity and re-flected apparent temperature can be altered retrospectively. If you notice that these pa-rameters have been set incorrectly or want to add more measurement spots, thetemperature measurement values will be calculated or recalculated according to thechanges (see Figure 33.11).#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 190
The secret to a good thermal image33Figure 33.11 Change in emissivity for a saved image. The maximum temperature is 65.0°C (149°F) for ε= 0.95 in the left image and 77.3°C (171.1°F) for ε = 0.7 in the right image.33.6 Taking images—practical tipsThe following list includes some practical tips. However, note that this is not a compre-hensive description of the thermal imaging procedure.• Ensure that the camera is saving radiometric images.• Choose an appropriate position from which to take images:◦ Observe the radiative situation.◦ Check that the object is clearly visible and displayed at an appropriate size andposition.• If you change the emissivity, monitor the temperature range and make sure that it re-mains appropriate.• Focus.• Use a tripod to minimize camera shake.• Carry out thermal tuning.• Take note of the object description, object size, actual distance, environmental condi-tions, and operating conditions.It is easier to edit the thermal image when it is saved or “frozen” (in “Preview”). Also,since you don't have to do everything on site, you can leave dangerous zones immedi-ately after taking the image. If possible, take a few more images than you need—includ-ing from different angles. This is preferable to taking too few! You can then choose thebest image afterwards, at leisure.33.7 ConclusionTaking a good thermal image does not require any magic tricks—solid craft and soundwork is all that is required. Many of the points mentioned may seem trivial and “old news,”particularly to amateur photographers. Of course, the equipment plays a role easier toensure sharp images. Better, i.e. high-definition, cameras allow the fast localization ofeven small anomalies, and without focusing capabilities it is always difficult to capture asharp image. However, high-end cameras are no guarantee of good images if used in-correctly. The basis for good, professional work is education and training in thermogra-phy, exchange of knowledge with other thermographers, and, of course, practicalexperience.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 191
About calibration3434.1 IntroductionCalibration of a thermal camera is a prerequisite for temperature measurement. The cali-bration provides the relationship between the input signal and the physical quantity thatthe user wants to measure. However, despite its widespread and frequent use, the term“calibration” is often misunderstood and misused. Local and national differences as wellas translation-related issues create additional confusion.Unclear terminology can lead to difficulties in communication and erroneous translations,and subsequently to incorrect measurements due to misunderstandings and, in the worstcase, even to lawsuits.34.2 Definition—what is calibration?The International Bureau of Weights and Measures16 defines calibration17 in the followingway:an operation that, under specified conditions, in a first step, establishes a relation be-tween the quantity values with measurement uncertainties provided by measurementstandards and corresponding indications with associated measurement uncertaintiesand, in a second step, uses this information to establish a relation for obtaining a meas-urement result from an indication.The calibration itself may be expressed in different formats: this can be a statement, cali-bration function, calibration diagram18, calibration curve19, or calibration table.Often, the first step alone in the above definition is perceived and referred to as being“calibration.” However, this is not (always) sufficient.Considering the calibration procedure of a thermal camera, the first step establishes therelation between emitted radiation (the quantity value) and the electrical output signal(the indication). This first step of the calibration procedure consists of obtaining a homo-geneous (or uniform) response when the camera is placed in front of an extended sourceof radiation.As we know the temperature of the reference source emitting the radiation, in the secondstep the obtained output signal (the indication) can be related to the reference source’stemperature (measurement result). The second step includes drift measurement andcompensation.To be correct, calibration of a thermal camera is, strictly, not expressed through tempera-ture. Thermal cameras are sensitive to infrared radiation: therefore, at first you obtain aradiance correspondence, then a relationship between radiance and temperature. Forbolometer cameras used by non-R&D customers, radiance is not expressed: only thetemperature is provided.34.3 Camera calibration at FLIR SystemsWithout calibration, an infrared camera would not be able to measure either radiance ortemperature. At FLIR Systems, the calibration of uncooled microbolometer cameras witha measurement capability is carried out during both production and service. Cooled cam-eras with photon detectors are often calibrated by the user with special software. Withthis type of software, in theory, common handheld uncooled thermal cameras could becalibrated by the user too. However, as this software is not suitable for reporting#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 19216.http://www.bipm.org/en/about-us/ [Retrieved 2017-01-31.]17.http://jcgm.bipm.org/vim/en/2.39.html [Retrieved 2017-01-31.]18.http://jcgm.bipm.org/vim/en/4.30.html [Retrieved 2017-01-31.]19.http://jcgm.bipm.org/vim/en/4.31.html [Retrieved 2017-01-31.]
About calibration34purposes, most users do not have it. Non-measuring devices that are used for imagingonly do not need temperature calibration. Sometimes this is also reflected in camera ter-minology when talking about infrared or thermal imaging cameras compared with ther-mography cameras, where the latter are the measuring devices.The calibration information, no matter if the calibration is done by FLIR Systems or theuser, is stored in calibration curves, which are expressed by mathematical functions. Asradiation intensity changes with both temperature and the distance between the objectand the camera, different curves are generated for different temperature ranges and ex-changeable lenses.34.4 The differences between a calibrationperformed by a user and that performed directlyat FLIR SystemsFirst, the reference sources that FLIR Systems uses are themselves calibrated andtraceable. This means, at each FLIR Systems site performing calibration, that the sour-ces are controlled by an independent national authority. The camera calibration certifi-cate is confirmation of this. It is proof that not only has the calibration been performed byFLIR Systems but that it has also been carried out using calibrated references. Someusers own or have access to accredited reference sources, but they are very few innumber.Second, there is a technical difference. When performing a user calibration, the result isoften (but not always) not drift compensated. This means that the values do not take intoaccount a possible change in the camera’s output when the camera’s internal tempera-ture varies. This yields a larger uncertainty. Drift compensation uses data obtained in cli-mate-controlled chambers. All FLIR Systems cameras are drift compensated when theyare first delivered to the customer and when they are recalibrated by FLIR Systems serv-ice departments.34.5 Calibration, verification and adjustmentA common misconception is to confuse calibration with verification or adjustment. In-deed, calibration is a prerequisite for verification, which provides confirmation that speci-fied requirements are met. Verification provides objective evidence that a given itemfulfills specified requirements. To obtain the verification, defined temperatures (emittedradiation) of calibrated and traceable reference sources are measured. The measure-ment results, including the deviation, are noted in a table. The verification certificatestates that these measurement results meet specified requirements. Sometimes, compa-nies or organizations offer and market this verification certificate as a “calibrationcertificate.”Proper verification—and by extension calibration and/or recalibration—can only beachieved when a validated protocol is respected. The process is more than placing thecamera in front of blackbodies and checking if the camera output (as temperature, for in-stance) corresponds to the original calibration table. It is often forgotten that a camera isnot sensitive to temperature but to radiation. Furthermore, a camera is an imaging sys-tem, not just a single sensor. Consequently, if the optical configuration allowing the cam-era to “collect” radiance is poor or misaligned, then the “verification” (or calibration orrecalibration) is worthless.For instance, one has to ensure that the distance between the blackbody and the cameraas well as the diameter of the blackbody cavity are chosen so as to reduce stray radiationand the size-of-source effect.To summarize: a validated protocol must comply with the physical laws for radiance, andnot only those for temperature.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 193
About calibration34Calibration is also a prerequisite for adjustment, which is the set of operations carried outon a measuring system such that the system provides prescribed indications corre-sponding to given values of quantities to be measured, typically obtained from measure-ment standards. Simplified, adjustment is a manipulation that results in instruments thatmeasure correctly within their specifications. In everyday language, the term “calibration”is widely used instead of “adjustment” for measuring devices.34.6 Non-uniformity correctionWhen the thermal camera displays ”Calibrating…” it is adjusting for the deviation in re-sponse of each individual detector element (pixel). In thermography, this is called a ”non-uniformity correction” (NUC). It is an offset update, and the gain remains unchanged.The European standard EN 16714-3, Non-destructive Testing—Thermographic Testing—Part 3: Terms and Definitions, defines an NUC as “Image correction carried out by thecamera software to compensate for different sensitivities of detector elements and otheroptical and geometrical disturbances.”During the NUC (the offset update), a shutter (internal flag) is placed in the optical path,and all the detector elements are exposed to the same amount of radiation originatingfrom the shutter. Therefore, in an ideal situation, they should all give the same output sig-nal. However, each individual element has its own response, so the output is not uniform.This deviation from the ideal result is calculated and used to mathematically perform animage correction, which is essentially a correction of the displayed radiation signal.Some cameras do not have an internal flag. In this case, the offset update must be per-formed manually using special software and an external uniform source of radiation.An NUC is performed, for example, at start-up, when changing a measurement range, orwhen the environment temperature changes. Some cameras also allow the user to trig-ger it manually. This is useful when you have to perform a critical measurement with aslittle image disturbance as possible.34.7 Thermal image adjustment (thermaltuning)Some people use the term “image calibration” when adjusting the thermal contrast andbrightness in the image to enhance specific details. During this operation, the tempera-ture interval is set in such a way that all available colors are used to show only (or mainly)the temperatures in the region of interest. The correct term for this manipulation is “ther-mal image adjustment” or “thermal tuning”, or, in some languages, “thermal image optimi-zation.” You must be in manual mode to undertake this, otherwise the camera will set thelower and upper limits of the displayed temperature interval automatically to the coldestand hottest temperatures in the scene.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 194
History of infrared technology35Before the year 1800, the existence of the infrared portion of the electromagnetic spec-trum wasn't even suspected. The original significance of the infrared spectrum, or simply‘the infrared’ as it is often called, as a form of heat radiation is perhaps less obvious to-day than it was at the time of its discovery by Herschel in 1800.Figure 35.1 Sir William Herschel (1738–1822)The discovery was made accidentally during the search for a new optical material. SirWilliam Herschel – Royal Astronomer to King George III of England, and already famousfor his discovery of the planet Uranus – was searching for an optical filter material to re-duce the brightness of the sun’s image in telescopes during solar observations. Whiletesting different samples of colored glass which gave similar reductions in brightness hewas intrigued to find that some of the samples passed very little of the sun’s heat, whileothers passed so much heat that he risked eye damage after only a few seconds’observation.Herschel was soon convinced of the necessity of setting up a systematic experiment,with the objective of finding a single material that would give the desired reduction inbrightness as well as the maximum reduction in heat. He began the experiment by ac-tually repeating Newton’s prism experiment, but looking for the heating effect rather thanthe visual distribution of intensity in the spectrum. He first blackened the bulb of a sensi-tive mercury-in-glass thermometer with ink, and with this as his radiation detector he pro-ceeded to test the heating effect of the various colors of the spectrum formed on the topof a table by passing sunlight through a glass prism. Other thermometers, placed outsidethe sun’s rays, served as controls.As the blackened thermometer was moved slowly along the colors of the spectrum, thetemperature readings showed a steady increase from the violet end to the red end. Thiswas not entirely unexpected, since the Italian researcher, Landriani, in a similar experi-ment in 1777 had observed much the same effect. It was Herschel, however, who wasthe first to recognize that there must be a point where the heating effect reaches a maxi-mum, and that measurements confined to the visible portion of the spectrum failed to lo-cate this point.Figure 35.2 Marsilio Landriani (1746–1815)Moving the thermometer into the dark region beyond the red end of the spectrum, Her-schel confirmed that the heating continued to increase. The maximum point, when hefound it, lay well beyond the red end – in what is known today as the ‘infraredwavelengths’.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 195
History of infrared technology35When Herschel revealed his discovery, he referred to this new portion of the electromag-netic spectrum as the ‘thermometrical spectrum’. The radiation itself he sometimes re-ferred to as ‘dark heat’, or simply ‘the invisible rays’. Ironically, and contrary to popularopinion, it wasn't Herschel who originated the term ‘infrared’. The word only began to ap-pear in print around 75 years later, and it is still unclear who should receive credit as theoriginator.Herschel’s use of glass in the prism of his original experiment led to some early contro-versies with his contemporaries about the actual existence of the infrared wavelengths.Different investigators, in attempting to confirm his work, used various types of glass in-discriminately, having different transparencies in the infrared. Through his later experi-ments, Herschel was aware of the limited transparency of glass to the newly-discoveredthermal radiation, and he was forced to conclude that optics for the infrared would prob-ably be doomed to the use of reflective elements exclusively (i.e. plane and curved mir-rors). Fortunately, this proved to be true only until 1830, when the Italian investigator,Melloni, made his great discovery that naturally occurring rock salt (NaCl) – which wasavailable in large enough natural crystals to be made into lenses and prisms – is remark-ably transparent to the infrared. The result was that rock salt became the principal infra-red optical material, and remained so for the next hundred years, until the art of syntheticcrystal growing was mastered in the 1930’s.Figure 35.3 Macedonio Melloni (1798–1854)Thermometers, as radiation detectors, remained unchallenged until 1829, the year Nobiliinvented the thermocouple. (Herschel’s own thermometer could be read to 0.2 °C(0.036 °F), and later models were able to be read to 0.05 °C (0.09 °F)). Then a break-through occurred; Melloni connected a number of thermocouples in series to form thefirst thermopile. The new device was at least 40 times as sensitive as the best thermome-ter of the day for detecting heat radiation – capable of detecting the heat from a personstanding three meters away.The first so-called ‘heat-picture’ became possible in 1840, the result of work by Sir JohnHerschel, son of the discoverer of the infrared and a famous astronomer in his own right.Based upon the differential evaporation of a thin film of oil when exposed to a heat pat-tern focused upon it, the thermal image could be seen by reflected light where the inter-ference effects of the oil film made the image visible to the eye. Sir John also managedto obtain a primitive record of the thermal image on paper, which he called a‘thermograph’.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 196
History of infrared technology35Figure 35.4 Samuel P. Langley (1834–1906)The improvement of infrared-detector sensitivity progressed slowly. Another major break-through, made by Langley in 1880, was the invention of the bolometer. This consisted ofa thin blackened strip of platinum connected in one arm of a Wheatstone bridge circuitupon which the infrared radiation was focused and to which a sensitive galvanometer re-sponded. This instrument is said to have been able to detect the heat from a cow at adistance of 400 meters.An English scientist, Sir James Dewar, first introduced the use of liquefied gases as cool-ing agents (such as liquid nitrogen with a temperature of –196°C (–320.8°F)) in low tem-perature research. In 1892 he invented a unique vacuum insulating container in which itis possible to store liquefied gases for entire days. The common ‘thermos bottle’, usedfor storing hot and cold drinks, is based upon his invention.Between the years 1900 and 1920, the inventors of the world ‘discovered’ the infrared.Many patents were issued for devices to detect personnel, artillery, aircraft, ships – andeven icebergs. The first operating systems, in the modern sense, began to be developedduring the 1914–18 war, when both sides had research programs devoted to the militaryexploitation of the infrared. These programs included experimental systems for enemyintrusion/detection, remote temperature sensing, secure communications, and ‘flying tor-pedo’ guidance. An infrared search system tested during this period was able to detectan approaching airplane at a distance of 1.5 km (0.94 miles), or a person more than 300meters (984 ft.) away.The most sensitive systems up to this time were all based upon variations of the bolome-ter idea, but the period between the two wars saw the development of two revolutionarynew infrared detectors: the image converter and the photon detector. At first, the imageconverter received the greatest attention by the military, because it enabled an observerfor the first time in history to literally ‘see in the dark’. However, the sensitivity of the im-age converter was limited to the near infrared wavelengths, and the most interesting mili-tary targets (i.e. enemy soldiers) had to be illuminated by infrared search beams. Sincethis involved the risk of giving away the observer’s position to a similarly-equipped enemyobserver, it is understandable that military interest in the image converter eventuallyfaded.The tactical military disadvantages of so-called 'active’ (i.e. search beam-equipped) ther-mal imaging systems provided impetus following the 1939–45 war for extensive secretmilitary infrared-research programs into the possibilities of developing ‘passive’ (nosearch beam) systems around the extremely sensitive photon detector. During this peri-od, military secrecy regulations completely prevented disclosure of the status of infrared-imaging technology. This secrecy only began to be lifted in the middle of the 1950’s, andfrom that time adequate thermal-imaging devices finally began to be available to civilianscience and industry.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 197
Theory of thermography3636.1 IntroductionThe subjects of infrared radiation and the related technique of thermography are still newto many who will use an infrared camera. In this section the theory behind thermographywill be given.36.2 The electromagnetic spectrumThe electromagnetic spectrum is divided arbitrarily into a number of wavelength regions,called bands, distinguished by the methods used to produce and detect the radiation.There is no fundamental difference between radiation in the different bands of the elec-tromagnetic spectrum. They are all governed by the same laws and the only differencesare those due to differences in wavelength.Figure 36.1 The electromagnetic spectrum. 1: X-ray; 2: UV; 3: Visible; 4: IR; 5: Microwaves; 6:Radiowaves.Thermography makes use of the infrared spectral band. At the short-wavelength end theboundary lies at the limit of visual perception, in the deep red. At the long-wavelengthend it merges with the microwave radio wavelengths, in the millimeter range.The infrared band is often further subdivided into four smaller bands, the boundaries ofwhich are also arbitrarily chosen. They include: the near infrared (0.75–3 μm), the middleinfrared (3–6 μm), the far infrared (6–15 μm) and the extreme infrared (15–100 μm).Although the wavelengths are given in μm (micrometers), other units are often still usedto measure wavelength in this spectral region, e.g. nanometer (nm) and Ångström (Å).The relationships between the different wavelength measurements is:36.3 Blackbody radiationA blackbody is defined as an object which absorbs all radiation that impinges on it at anywavelength. The apparent misnomer black relating to an object emitting radiation is ex-plained by Kirchhoff’s Law (after Gustav Robert Kirchhoff, 1824–1887), which states thata body capable of absorbing all radiation at any wavelength is equally capable in theemission of radiation.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 198
Theory of thermography36Figure 36.2 Gustav Robert Kirchhoff (1824–1887)The construction of a blackbody source is, in principle, very simple. The radiation charac-teristics of an aperture in an isotherm cavity made of an opaque absorbing material rep-resents almost exactly the properties of a blackbody. A practical application of theprinciple to the construction of a perfect absorber of radiation consists of a box that islight tight except for an aperture in one of the sides. Any radiation which then enters thehole is scattered and absorbed by repeated reflections so only an infinitesimal fractioncan possibly escape. The blackness which is obtained at the aperture is nearly equal toa blackbody and almost perfect for all wavelengths.By providing such an isothermal cavity with a suitable heater it becomes what is termedacavity radiator. An isothermal cavity heated to a uniform temperature generates black-body radiation, the characteristics of which are determined solely by the temperature ofthe cavity. Such cavity radiators are commonly used as sources of radiation in tempera-ture reference standards in the laboratory for calibrating thermographic instruments,such as a FLIR Systems camera for example.If the temperature of blackbody radiation increases to more than 525°C (977°F), thesource begins to be visible so that it appears to the eye no longer black. This is the incipi-ent red heat temperature of the radiator, which then becomes orange or yellow as thetemperature increases further. In fact, the definition of the so-called color temperature ofan object is the temperature to which a blackbody would have to be heated to have thesame appearance.Now consider three expressions that describe the radiation emitted from a blackbody.36.3.1 Planck’s lawFigure 36.3 Max Planck (1858–1947)Max Planck (1858–1947) was able to describe the spectral distribution of the radiationfrom a blackbody by means of the following formula:#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 199
Theory of thermography36where:Wλb Blackbody spectral radiant emittance at wavelength λ.cVelocity of light = 3 × 108m/sh Planck’s constant = 6.6 × 10-34 Joule sec.kBoltzmann’s constant = 1.4 × 10-23 Joule/K.T Absolute temperature (K) of a blackbody.λ Wavelength (μm).Note The factor 10-6 is used since spectral emittance in the curves is expressed inWatt/m2, μm.Planck’s formula, when plotted graphically for various temperatures, produces a family ofcurves. Following any particular Planck curve, the spectral emittance is zero at λ = 0,then increases rapidly to a maximum at a wavelength λmax and after passing it ap-proaches zero again at very long wavelengths. The higher the temperature, the shorterthe wavelength at which maximum occurs.Figure 36.4 Blackbody spectral radiant emittance according to Planck’s law, plotted for various absolutetemperatures. 1: Spectral radiant emittance (W/cm2× 103(μm)); 2: Wavelength (μm)36.3.2 Wien’s displacement lawBy differentiating Planck’s formula with respect to λ, and finding the maximum, we have:This is Wien’s formula (after Wilhelm Wien, 1864–1928), which expresses mathemati-cally the common observation that colors vary from red to orange or yellow as the tem-perature of a thermal radiator increases. The wavelength of the color is the same as thewavelength calculated for λmax. A good approximation of the value of λmax for a givenblackbody temperature is obtained by applying the rule-of-thumb 3 000/T μm. Thus, avery hot star such as Sirius (11 000 K), emitting bluish-white light, radiates with the peakof spectral radiant emittance occurring within the invisible ultraviolet spectrum, at wave-length 0.27 μm.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 200
Theory of thermography36Figure 36.5 Wilhelm Wien (1864–1928)The sun (approx. 6 000 K) emits yellow light, peaking at about 0.5 μm in the middle ofthe visible light spectrum.At room temperature (300 K) the peak of radiant emittance lies at 9.7 μm, in the far infra-red, while at the temperature of liquid nitrogen (77 K) the maximum of the almost insignif-icant amount of radiant emittance occurs at 38 μm, in the extreme infrared wavelengths.Figure 36.6 Planckian curves plotted on semi-log scales from 100 K to 1000 K. The dotted line representsthe locus of maximum radiant emittance at each temperature as described by Wien's displacement law. 1:Spectral radiant emittance (W/cm2(μm)); 2: Wavelength (μm).36.3.3 Stefan-Boltzmann's lawBy integrating Planck’s formula from λ = 0 to λ = ∞, we obtain the total radiant emittance(Wb) of a blackbody:This is the Stefan-Boltzmann formula (after Josef Stefan, 1835–1893, and Ludwig Boltz-mann, 1844–1906), which states that the total emissive power of a blackbody is propor-tional to the fourth power of its absolute temperature. Graphically, Wbrepresents thearea below the Planck curve for a particular temperature. It can be shown that the radiantemittance in the interval λ = 0 to λmax is only 25% of the total, which represents about theamount of the sun’s radiation which lies inside the visible light spectrum.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 201
Theory of thermography36Figure 36.7 Josef Stefan (1835–1893), and Ludwig Boltzmann (1844–1906)Using the Stefan-Boltzmann formula to calculate the power radiated by the human body,at a temperature of 300 K and an external surface area of approx. 2 m2, we obtain 1 kW.This power loss could not be sustained if it were not for the compensating absorption ofradiation from surrounding surfaces, at room temperatures which do not vary too drasti-cally from the temperature of the body – or, of course, the addition of clothing.36.3.4 Non-blackbody emittersSo far, only blackbody radiators and blackbody radiation have been discussed. However,real objects almost never comply with these laws over an extended wavelength region –although they may approach the blackbody behavior in certain spectral intervals. For ex-ample, a certain type of white paint may appear perfectly white in the visible light spec-trum, but becomes distinctly gray at about 2 μm, and beyond 3 μm it is almost black.There are three processes which can occur that prevent a real object from acting like ablackbody: a fraction of the incident radiation α may be absorbed, a fraction ρ may be re-flected, and a fraction τ may be transmitted. Since all of these factors are more or lesswavelength dependent, the subscript λ is used to imply the spectral dependence of theirdefinitions. Thus:• The spectral absorptance αλ= the ratio of the spectral radiant power absorbed by anobject to that incident upon it.• The spectral reflectance ρλ= the ratio of the spectral radiant power reflected by an ob-ject to that incident upon it.• The spectral transmittance τλ= the ratio of the spectral radiant power transmittedthrough an object to that incident upon it.The sum of these three factors must always add up to the whole at any wavelength, sowe have the relation:For opaque materials τλ= 0 and the relation simplifies to:Another factor, called the emissivity, is required to describe the fraction ε of the radiantemittance of a blackbody produced by an object at a specific temperature. Thus, wehave the definition:The spectral emissivity ελ= the ratio of the spectral radiant power from an object to thatfrom a blackbody at the same temperature and wavelength.Expressed mathematically, this can be written as the ratio of the spectral emittance ofthe object to that of a blackbody as follows:Generally speaking, there are three types of radiation source, distinguished by the waysin which the spectral emittance of each varies with wavelength.• A blackbody, for which ελ= ε = 1• A graybody, for which ελ= ε = constant less than 1#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 202
Theory of thermography36• A selective radiator, for which ε varies with wavelengthAccording to Kirchhoff’s law, for any material the spectral emissivity and spectral absorp-tance of a body are equal at any specified temperature and wavelength. That is:From this we obtain, for an opaque material (since αλ+ ρλ= 1):For highly polished materials ελapproaches zero, so that for a perfectly reflecting materi-al (i.e. a perfect mirror) we have:For a graybody radiator, the Stefan-Boltzmann formula becomes:This states that the total emissive power of a graybody is the same as a blackbody at thesame temperature reduced in proportion to the value of ε from the graybody.Figure 36.8 Spectral radiant emittance of three types of radiators. 1: Spectral radiant emittance; 2: Wave-length; 3: Blackbody; 4: Selective radiator; 5: Graybody.Figure 36.9 Spectral emissivity of three types of radiators. 1: Spectral emissivity; 2: Wavelength; 3: Black-body; 4: Graybody; 5: Selective radiator.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 203
Theory of thermography3636.4 Infrared semi-transparent materialsConsider now a non-metallic, semi-transparent body – let us say, in the form of a thick flatplate of plastic material. When the plate is heated, radiation generated within its volumemust work its way toward the surfaces through the material in which it is partially ab-sorbed. Moreover, when it arrives at the surface, some of it is reflected back into the inte-rior. The back-reflected radiation is again partially absorbed, but some of it arrives at theother surface, through which most of it escapes; part of it is reflected back again.Although the progressive reflections become weaker and weaker they must all be addedup when the total emittance of the plate is sought. When the resulting geometrical seriesis summed, the effective emissivity of a semi-transparent plate is obtained as:When the plate becomes opaque this formula is reduced to the single formula:This last relation is a particularly convenient one, because it is often easier to measurereflectance than to measure emissivity directly.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 204
The measurement formula37As already mentioned, when viewing an object, the camera receives radiation not onlyfrom the object itself. It also collects radiation from the surroundings reflected via the ob-ject surface. Both these radiation contributions become attenuated to some extent by theatmosphere in the measurement path. To this comes a third radiation contribution fromthe atmosphere itself.This description of the measurement situation, as illustrated in the figure below, is so fara fairly true description of the real conditions. What has been neglected could for in-stance be sun light scattering in the atmosphere or stray radiation from intense radiationsources outside the field of view. Such disturbances are difficult to quantify, however, inmost cases they are fortunately small enough to be neglected. In case they are not negli-gible, the measurement configuration is likely to be such that the risk for disturbance isobvious, at least to a trained operator. It is then his responsibility to modify the measure-ment situation to avoid the disturbance e.g. by changing the viewing direction, shieldingoff intense radiation sources etc.Accepting the description above, we can use the figure below to derive a formula for thecalculation of the object temperature from the calibrated camera output.Figure 37.1 A schematic representation of the general thermographic measurement situation.1: Sur-roundings; 2: Object; 3: Atmosphere; 4: CameraAssume that the received radiation power W from a blackbody source of temperatureTsource on short distance generates a camera output signal Usource that is proportional tothe power input (power linear camera). We can then write (Equation 1):or, with simplified notation:where C is a constant.Should the source be a graybody with emittance ε, the received radiation would conse-quently be εWsource.We are now ready to write the three collected radiation power terms:1. Emission from the object = ετWobj, where ε is the emittance of the object and τ is thetransmittance of the atmosphere. The object temperature is Tobj.#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 205
The measurement formula372. Reflected emission from ambient sources = (1 – ε)τWrefl, where (1 – ε) is the reflec-tance of the object. The ambient sources have the temperature Trefl.It has here been assumed that the temperature Trefl is the same for all emitting surfa-ces within the halfsphere seen from a point on the object surface. This is of coursesometimes a simplification of the true situation. It is, however, a necessary simplifica-tion in order to derive a workable formula, and Trefl can – at least theoretically – be giv-en a value that represents an efficient temperature of a complex surrounding.Note also that we have assumed that the emittance for the surroundings = 1. This iscorrect in accordance with Kirchhoff’s law: All radiation impinging on the surroundingsurfaces will eventually be absorbed by the same surfaces. Thus the emittance = 1.(Note though that the latest discussion requires the complete sphere around the ob-ject to be considered.)3. Emission from the atmosphere = (1 – τ)τWatm, where (1 – τ) is the emittance of the at-mosphere. The temperature of the atmosphere is Tatm.The total received radiation power can now be written (Equation 2):We multiply each term by the constant C of Equation 1 and replace the CW products bythe corresponding U according to the same equation, and get (Equation 3):Solve Equation 3 for Uobj (Equation 4):This is the general measurement formula used in all the FLIR Systems thermographicequipment. The voltages of the formula are:Table 37.1 VoltagesUobj Calculated camera output voltage for a blackbody of temperatureTobj i.e. a voltage that can be directly converted into true requestedobject temperature.Utot Measured camera output voltage for the actual case.Urefl Theoretical camera output voltage for a blackbody of temperatureTrefl according to the calibration.Uatm Theoretical camera output voltage for a blackbody of temperatureTatm according to the calibration.The operator has to supply a number of parameter values for the calculation:• the object emittance ε,• the relative humidity,• Tatm• object distance (Dobj)• the (effective) temperature of the object surroundings, or the reflected ambient tem-perature Trefl, and• the temperature of the atmosphere TatmThis task could sometimes be a heavy burden for the operator since there are normallyno easy ways to find accurate values of emittance and atmospheric transmittance for theactual case. The two temperatures are normally less of a problem provided the surround-ings do not contain large and intense radiation sources.A natural question in this connection is: How important is it to know the right values ofthese parameters? It could though be of interest to get a feeling for this problem alreadyhere by looking into some different measurement cases and compare the relative#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 206
The measurement formula37magnitudes of the three radiation terms. This will give indications about when it is impor-tant to use correct values of which parameters.The figures below illustrates the relative magnitudes of the three radiation contributionsfor three different object temperatures, two emittances, and two spectral ranges: SW andLW. Remaining parameters have the following fixed values:• τ = 0.88• Trefl = +20°C (+68°F)• Tatm = +20°C (+68°F)It is obvious that measurement of low object temperatures are more critical than measur-ing high temperatures since the ‘disturbing’ radiation sources are relatively much stron-ger in the first case. Should also the object emittance be low, the situation would be stillmore difficult.We have finally to answer a question about the importance of being allowed to use thecalibration curve above the highest calibration point, what we call extrapolation. Imaginethat we in a certain case measure Utot = 4.5 volts. The highest calibration point for thecamera was in the order of 4.1 volts, a value unknown to the operator. Thus, even if theobject happened to be a blackbody, i.e. Uobj = Utot, we are actually performing extrapola-tion of the calibration curve when converting 4.5 volts into temperature.Let us now assume that the object is not black, it has an emittance of 0.75, and the trans-mittance is 0.92. We also assume that the two second terms of Equation 4 amount to 0.5volts together. Computation of Uobj by means of Equation 4 then results in Uobj = 4.5 /0.75 / 0.92 – 0.5 = 6.0. This is a rather extreme extrapolation, particularly when consider-ing that the video amplifier might limit the output to 5 volts! Note, though, that the applica-tion of the calibration curve is a theoretical procedure where no electronic or otherlimitations exist. We trust that if there had been no signal limitations in the camera, and ifit had been calibrated far beyond 5 volts, the resulting curve would have been very muchthe same as our real curve extrapolated beyond 4.1 volts, provided the calibration algo-rithm is based on radiation physics, like the FLIR Systems algorithm. Of course theremust be a limit to such extrapolations.Figure 37.2 Relative magnitudes of radiation sources under varying measurement conditions (SW cam-era). 1: Object temperature; 2: Emittance; Obj: Object radiation; Refl: Reflected radiation; Atm: atmos-phere radiation. Fixed parameters: τ = 0.88; Trefl = 20°C (+68°F); Tatm = 20°C (+68°F).#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 207
The measurement formula37Figure 37.3 Relative magnitudes of radiation sources under varying measurement conditions (LW cam-era). 1: Object temperature; 2: Emittance; Obj: Object radiation; Refl: Reflected radiation; Atm: atmos-phere radiation. Fixed parameters: τ = 0.88; Trefl = 20°C (+68°F); Tatm = 20°C (+68°F).#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 208
Emissivity tables38This section presents a compilation of emissivity data from the infrared literature andmeasurements made by FLIR Systems.38.1 References1. Mikaél A. Bramson: Infrared Radiation, A Handbook for Applications, Plenum press,N.Y.2. William L. Wolfe, George J. Zissis: The Infrared Handbook, Office of Naval Research,Department of Navy, Washington, D.C.3. Madding, R. P.: Thermographic Instruments and systems. Madison, Wisconsin: Uni-versity of Wisconsin – Extension, Department of Engineering and Applied Science.4. William L. Wolfe: Handbook of Military Infrared Technology, Office of Naval Research,Department of Navy, Washington, D.C.5. Jones, Smith, Probert: External thermography of buildings..., Proc. of the Society ofPhoto-Optical Instrumentation Engineers, vol.110, Industrial and Civil Applications ofInfrared Technology, June 1977 London.6. Paljak, Pettersson: Thermography of Buildings, Swedish Building Research Institute,Stockholm 1972.7. Vlcek, J: Determination of emissivity with imaging radiometers and some emissivitiesat λ = 5 µm. Photogrammetric Engineering and Remote Sensing.8. Kern: Evaluation of infrared emission of clouds and ground as measured by weathersatellites, Defence Documentation Center, AD 617 417.9. Öhman, Claes: Emittansmätningar med AGEMA E-Box. Teknisk rapport, AGEMA1999. (Emittance measurements using AGEMA E-Box. Technical report, AGEMA1999.)10. Matteï, S., Tang-Kwor, E: Emissivity measurements for Nextel Velvet coating 811-21between –36°C AND 82°C.11. Lohrengel & Todtenhaupt (1996)12. ITC Technical publication 32.13. ITC Technical publication 29.14. Schuster, Norbert and Kolobrodov, Valentin G. Infrarotthermographie. Berlin: Wiley-VCH, 2000.Note The emissivity values in the table below are recorded using a shortwave (SW)camera. The values should be regarded as recommendations only and used withcaution.38.2 TablesTable 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference1 2 3 4 5 63M type 35 Vinyl electricaltape (severalcolors)< 80 LW ≈ 0.96 133M type 88 Black vinyl electri-cal tape< 105 LW ≈ 0.96 133M type 88 Black vinyl electri-cal tape< 105 MW < 0.96 133M type Super 33+Black vinyl electri-cal tape< 80 LW ≈ 0.96 13Aluminum anodized sheet 100 T 0.55 2Aluminum anodized, black,dull70 SW 0.67 9Aluminum anodized, black,dull70 LW 0.95 9#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 209
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Aluminum anodized, lightgray, dull70 SW 0.61 9Aluminum anodized, lightgray, dull70 LW 0.97 9Aluminum as received, plate 100 T 0.09 4Aluminum as received,sheet100 T 0.09 2Aluminum cast, blastcleaned70 SW 0.47 9Aluminum cast, blastcleaned70 LW 0.46 9Aluminum dipped in HNO3,plate100 T 0.05 4Aluminum foil 27 10 µm 0.04 3Aluminum foil 27 3 µm 0.09 3Aluminum oxidized, strongly 50–500 T 0.2–0.3 1Aluminum polished 50–100 T 0.04–0.06 1Aluminum polished plate 100 T 0.05 4Aluminum polished, sheet 100 T 0.05 2Aluminum rough surface 20–50 T 0.06–0.07 1Aluminum roughened 27 10 µm 0.18 3Aluminum roughened 27 3 µm 0.28 3Aluminum sheet, 4 samplesdifferentlyscratched70 SW 0.05–0.08 9Aluminum sheet, 4 samplesdifferentlyscratched70 LW 0.03–0.06 9Aluminum vacuumdeposited20 T 0.04 2Aluminum weathered,heavily17 SW 0.83–0.94 5Aluminum bronze 20 T 0.60 1Aluminumhydroxidepowder T 0.28 1Aluminum oxide activated, powder T 0.46 1Aluminum oxide pure, powder(alumina)T 0.16 1Asbestos board 20 T 0.96 1Asbestos fabric T 0.78 1Asbestos floor tile 35 SW 0.94 7Asbestos paper 40–400 T 0.93–0.95 1Asbestos powder T 0.40–0.60 1Asbestos slate 20 T 0.96 1Asphalt paving 4 LLW 0.967 8Brass dull, tarnished 20–350 T 0.22 1Brass oxidized 100 T 0.61 2Brass oxidized 70 SW 0.04–0.09 9#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 210
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Brass oxidized 70 LW 0.03–0.07 9Brass oxidized at 600°C 200–600 T 0.59–0.61 1Brass polished 200 T 0.03 1Brass polished, highly 100 T 0.03 2Brass rubbed with 80-grit emery20 T 0.20 2Brass sheet, rolled 20 T 0.06 1Brass sheet, workedwith emery20 T 0.2 1Brick alumina 17 SW 0.68 5Brick common 17 SW 0.86–0.81 5Brick Dinas silica,glazed, rough1100 T 0.85 1Brick Dinas silica,refractory1000 T 0.66 1Brick Dinas silica, un-glazed, rough1000 T 0.80 1Brick firebrick 17 SW 0.68 5Brick fireclay 1000 T 0.75 1Brick fireclay 1200 T 0.59 1Brick fireclay 20 T 0.85 1Brick masonry 35 SW 0.94 7Brick masonry,plastered20 T 0.94 1Brick red, common 20 T 0.93 2Brick red, rough 20 T 0.88–0.93 1Brick refractory,corundum1000 T 0.46 1Brick refractory,magnesite1000–1300 T 0.38 1Brick refractory,strongly radiating500–1000 T 0.8–0.9 1Brick refractory, weaklyradiating500–1000 T 0.65–0.75 1Brick silica, 95% SiO21230 T 0.66 1Brick sillimanite, 33%SiO2, 64% Al2O31500 T 0.29 1Brick waterproof 17 SW 0.87 5Bronze phosphor bronze 70 SW 0.08 9Bronze phosphor bronze 70 LW 0.06 9Bronze polished 50 T 0.1 1Bronze porous, rough 50–150 T 0.55 1Bronze powder T 0.76–0.80 1Carbon candle soot 20 T 0.95 2Carbon charcoal powder T 0.96 1Carbon graphite powder T 0.97 1#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 211
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Carbon graphite, filedsurface20 T 0.98 2Carbon lampblack 20–400 T 0.95–0.97 1Chipboard untreated 20 SW 0.90 6Chromium polished 50 T 0.10 1Chromium polished 500–1000 T 0.28–0.38 1Clay fired 70 T 0.91 1Cloth black 20 T 0.98 1Concrete 20 T 0.92 2Concrete dry 36 SW 0.95 7Concrete rough 17 SW 0.97 5Concrete walkway 5LLW 0.974 8Copper commercial,burnished20 T 0.07 1Copper electrolytic, care-fully polished80 T 0.018 1Copper electrolytic,polished–34 T 0.006 4Copper molten 1100–1300 T 0.13–0.15 1Copper oxidized 50 T 0.6–0.7 1Copper oxidized toblacknessT 0.88 1Copper oxidized, black 27 T 0.78 4Copper oxidized, heavily 20 T 0.78 2Copper polished 50–100 T 0.02 1Copper polished 100 T 0.03 2Copper polished,commercial27 T 0.03 4Copper polished,mechanical22 T 0.015 4Copper pure, carefullyprepared surface22 T 0.008 4Copper scraped 27 T 0.07 4Copper dioxide powder T 0.84 1Copper oxide red, powder T 0.70 1Ebonite T 0.89 1Emery coarse 80 T 0.85 1Enamel 20 T 0.9 1Enamel lacquer 20 T 0.85–0.95 1Fiber board hard, untreated 20 SW 0.85 6Fiber board masonite 70 SW 0.75 9Fiber board masonite 70 LW 0.88 9Fiber board particle board 70 SW 0.77 9Fiber board particle board 70 LW 0.89 9Fiber board porous, untreated 20 SW 0.85 6#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 212
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Glass pane (floatglass)non-coated 20 LW 0.97 14Gold polished 130 T 0.018 1Gold polished, carefully 200–600 T 0.02–0.03 1Gold polished, highly 100 T 0.02 2Granite polished 20 LLW 0.849 8Granite rough 21 LLW 0.879 8Granite rough, 4 differentsamples70 SW 0.95–0.97 9Granite rough, 4 differentsamples70 LW 0.77–0.87 9Gypsum 20 T 0.8–0.9 1Ice: See WaterIron and steel cold rolled 70 SW 0.20 9Iron and steel cold rolled 70 LW 0.09 9Iron and steel covered with redrust20 T 0.61–0.85 1Iron and steel electrolytic 100 T 0.05 4Iron and steel electrolytic 22 T 0.05 4Iron and steel electrolytic 260 T 0.07 4Iron and steel electrolytic, care-fully polished175–225 T 0.05–0.06 1Iron and steel freshly workedwith emery20 T 0.24 1Iron and steel ground sheet 950–1100 T 0.55–0.61 1Iron and steel heavily rustedsheet20 T 0.69 2Iron and steel hot rolled 130 T 0.60 1Iron and steel hot rolled 20 T 0.77 1Iron and steel oxidized 100 T 0.74 4Iron and steel oxidized 100 T 0.74 1Iron and steel oxidized 1227 T 0.89 4Iron and steel oxidized 125–525 T 0.78–0.82 1Iron and steel oxidized 200 T 0.79 2Iron and steel oxidized 200–600 T 0.80 1Iron and steel oxidized strongly 50 T 0.88 1Iron and steel oxidized strongly 500 T 0.98 1Iron and steel polished 100 T 0.07 2Iron and steel polished 400–1000 T 0.14–0.38 1Iron and steel polished sheet 750–1050 T 0.52–0.56 1Iron and steel rolled sheet 50 T 0.56 1Iron and steel rolled, freshly 20 T 0.24 1Iron and steel rough, planesurface50 T 0.95–0.98 1Iron and steel rusted red, sheet 22 T 0.69 4Iron and steel rusted, heavily 17 SW 0.96 5#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 213
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Iron and steel rusty, red 20 T 0.69 1Iron and steel shiny oxide layer,sheet,20 T 0.82 1Iron and steel shiny, etched 150 T 0.16 1Iron and steel wrought, carefullypolished40–250 T 0.28 1Iron galvanized heavily oxidized 70 SW 0.64 9Iron galvanized heavily oxidized 70 LW 0.85 9Iron galvanized sheet 92 T 0.07 4Iron galvanized sheet, burnished 30 T 0.23 1Iron galvanized sheet, oxidized 20 T 0.28 1Iron tinned sheet 24 T 0.064 4Iron, cast casting 50 T 0.81 1Iron, cast ingots 1000 T 0.95 1Iron, cast liquid 1300 T 0.28 1Iron, cast machined 800–1000 T 0.60–0.70 1Iron, cast oxidized 100 T 0.64 2Iron, cast oxidized 260 T 0.66 4Iron, cast oxidized 38 T 0.63 4Iron, cast oxidized 538 T 0.76 4Iron, cast oxidized at 600°C 200–600 T 0.64–0.78 1Iron, cast polished 200 T 0.21 1Iron, cast polished 38 T 0.21 4Iron, cast polished 40 T 0.21 2Iron, cast unworked 900–1100 T 0.87–0.95 1Krylon Ultra-flatblack 1602Flat black Room tempera-ture up to 175LW ≈ 0.96 12Krylon Ultra-flatblack 1602Flat black Room tempera-ture up to 175MW ≈ 0.97 12Lacquer 3 colors sprayedon Aluminum70 SW 0.50–0.53 9Lacquer 3 colors sprayedon Aluminum70 LW 0.92–0.94 9Lacquer Aluminum onrough surface20 T 0.4 1Lacquer bakelite 80 T 0.83 1Lacquer black, dull 40–100 T 0.96–0.98 1Lacquer black, matte 100 T 0.97 2Lacquer black, shiny,sprayed on iron20 T 0.87 1Lacquer heat–resistant 100 T 0.92 1Lacquer white 100 T 0.92 2Lacquer white 40–100 T 0.8–0.95 1Lead oxidized at 200°C 200 T 0.63 1Lead oxidized, gray 20 T 0.28 1#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 214
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Lead oxidized, gray 22 T 0.28 4Lead shiny 250 T 0.08 1Lead unoxidized,polished100 T 0.05 4Lead red 100 T 0.93 4Lead red, powder 100 T 0.93 1Leather tanned T 0.75–0.80 1Lime T 0.3–0.4 1Magnesium 22 T 0.07 4Magnesium 260 T 0.13 4Magnesium 538 T 0.18 4Magnesium polished 20 T 0.07 2MagnesiumpowderT 0.86 1Molybdenum 1500–2200 T 0.19–0.26 1Molybdenum 600–1000 T 0.08–0.13 1Molybdenum filament 700–2500 T 0.1–0.3 1Mortar 17 SW 0.87 5Mortar dry 36 SW 0.94 7Nextel Velvet811-21 BlackFlat black –60–150 LW > 0.97 10 and11Nichrome rolled 700 T 0.25 1Nichrome sandblasted 700 T 0.70 1Nichrome wire, clean 50 T 0.65 1Nichrome wire, clean 500–1000 T 0.71–0.79 1Nichrome wire, oxidized 50–500 T 0.95–0.98 1Nickel bright matte 122 T 0.041 4Nickel commerciallypure, polished100 T 0.045 1Nickel commerciallypure, polished200–400 T 0.07–0.09 1Nickel electrolytic 22 T 0.04 4Nickel electrolytic 260 T 0.07 4Nickel electrolytic 38 T 0.06 4Nickel electrolytic 538 T 0.10 4Nickel electroplated oniron, polished22 T 0.045 4Nickel electroplated oniron, unpolished20 T 0.11–0.40 1Nickel electroplated oniron, unpolished22 T 0.11 4Nickel electroplated,polished20 T 0.05 2Nickel oxidized 1227 T 0.85 4Nickel oxidized 200 T 0.37 2Nickel oxidized 227 T 0.37 4#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 215
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Nickel oxidized at 600°C 200–600 T 0.37–0.48 1Nickel polished 122 T 0.045 4Nickel wire 200–1000 T 0.1–0.2 1Nickel oxide 1000–1250 T 0.75–0.86 1Nickel oxide 500–650 T 0.52–0.59 1Oil, lubricating 0.025 mm film 20 T 0.27 2Oil, lubricating 0.050 mm film 20 T 0.46 2Oil, lubricating 0.125 mm film 20 T 0.72 2Oil, lubricating film on Ni base:Ni base only20 T 0.05 2Oil, lubricating thick coating 20 T 0.82 2Paint 8 different colorsand qualities70 SW 0.88–0.96 9Paint 8 different colorsand qualities70 LW 0.92–0.94 9Paint Aluminum, vari-ous ages50–100 T 0.27–0.67 1Paint cadmium yellow T 0.28–0.33 1Paint chrome green T 0.65–0.70 1Paint cobalt blue T 0.7–0.8 1Paint oil 17 SW 0.87 5Paint oil based, aver-age of 16 colors100 T 0.94 2Paint oil, black flat 20 SW 0.94 6Paint oil, black gloss 20 SW 0.92 6Paint oil, gray flat 20 SW 0.97 6Paint oil, gray gloss 20 SW 0.96 6Paint oil, various colors 100 T 0.92–0.96 1Paint plastic, black 20 SW 0.95 6Paint plastic, white 20 SW 0.84 6Paper 4 different colors 70 SW 0.68–0.74 9Paper 4 different colors 70 LW 0.92–0.94 9Paper black T 0.90 1Paper black, dull T 0.94 1Paper black, dull 70 SW 0.86 9Paper black, dull 70 LW 0.89 9Paper blue, dark T 0.84 1Paper coated with blacklacquerT 0.93 1Paper green T 0.85 1Paper red T 0.76 1Paper white 20 T 0.7–0.9 1Paper white bond 20 T 0.93 2Paper white, 3 differentglosses70 SW 0.76–0.78 9#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 216
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Paper white, 3 differentglosses70 LW 0.88–0.90 9Paper yellow T 0.72 1Plaster 17 SW 0.86 5Plaster plasterboard,untreated20 SW 0.90 6Plaster rough coat 20 T 0.91 2Plastic glass fibre lami-nate (printed circ.board)70 SW 0.94 9Plastic glass fibre lami-nate (printed circ.board)70 LW 0.91 9Plastic polyurethane iso-lation board70 LW 0.55 9Plastic polyurethane iso-lation board70 SW 0.29 9Plastic PVC, plastic floor,dull, structured70 SW 0.94 9Plastic PVC, plastic floor,dull, structured70 LW 0.93 9Platinum 100 T 0.05 4Platinum 1000–1500 T 0.14–0.18 1Platinum 1094 T 0.18 4Platinum 17 T 0.016 4Platinum 22 T 0.03 4Platinum 260 T 0.06 4Platinum 538 T 0.10 4Platinum pure, polished 200–600 T 0.05–0.10 1Platinum ribbon 900–1100 T 0.12–0.17 1Platinum wire 1400 T 0.18 1Platinum wire 500–1000 T 0.10–0.16 1Platinum wire 50–200 T 0.06–0.07 1Porcelain glazed 20 T 0.92 1Porcelain white, shiny T 0.70–0.75 1Rubber hard 20 T 0.95 1Rubber soft, gray, rough 20 T 0.95 1Sand T 0.60 1Sand 20 T 0.90 2Sandstone polished 19 LLW 0.909 8Sandstone rough 19 LLW 0.935 8Silver polished 100 T 0.03 2Silver pure, polished 200–600 T 0.02–0.03 1Skin human 32 T 0.98 2Slag boiler 0–100 T 0.97–0.93 1Slag boiler 1400–1800 T 0.69–0.67 1Slag boiler 200–500 T 0.89–0.78 1#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 217
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Slag boiler 600–1200 T 0.76–0.70 1Snow: See WaterSoil dry 20 T 0.92 2Soil saturated withwater20 T 0.95 2Stainless steel alloy, 8% Ni, 18%Cr500 T 0.35 1Stainless steel rolled 700 T 0.45 1Stainless steel sandblasted 700 T 0.70 1Stainless steel sheet, polished 70 SW 0.18 9Stainless steel sheet, polished 70 LW 0.14 9Stainless steel sheet, untreated,somewhatscratched70 SW 0.30 9Stainless steel sheet, untreated,somewhatscratched70 LW 0.28 9Stainless steel type 18-8, buffed 20 T 0.16 2Stainless steel type 18-8, oxi-dized at 800°C60 T 0.85 2Stucco rough, lime 10–90 T 0.91 1Styrofoam insulation 37 SW 0.60 7Tar T 0.79–0.84 1Tar paper 20 T 0.91–0.93 1Tile glazed 17 SW 0.94 5Tin burnished 20–50 T 0.04–0.06 1Tin tin–plated sheetiron100 T 0.07 2Titanium oxidized at 540°C 1000 T 0.60 1Titanium oxidized at 540°C 200 T 0.40 1Titanium oxidized at 540°C 500 T 0.50 1Titanium polished 1000 T 0.36 1Titanium polished 200 T 0.15 1Titanium polished 500 T 0.20 1Tungsten 1500–2200 T 0.24–0.31 1Tungsten 200 T 0.05 1Tungsten 600–1000 T 0.1–0.16 1Tungsten filament 3300 T 0.39 1Varnish flat 20 SW 0.93 6Varnish on oak parquetfloor70 SW 0.90 9Varnish on oak parquetfloor70 LW 0.90–0.93 9Wallpaper slight pattern,light gray20 SW 0.85 6Wallpaper slight pattern, red 20 SW 0.90 6Water distilled 20 T 0.96 2#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 218
Emissivity tables38Table 38.1 T: Total spectrum; SW: 2–5 µm; LW: 8–14 µm, LLW: 6.5–20 µm; 1: Material; 2: Specification;3:Temperature in °C; 4: Spectrum; 5: Emissivity: 6:Reference (continued)1 2 3 4 5 6Water frost crystals –10 T 0.98 2Water ice, covered withheavy frost0 T 0.98 1Water ice, smooth 0 T 0.97 1Water ice, smooth –10 T 0.96 2Water layer >0.1 mmthick0–100 T 0.95–0.98 1Water snow T 0.8 1Water snow –10 T 0.85 2Wood 17 SW 0.98 5Wood 19 LLW 0.962 8Wood ground T 0.5–0.7 1Wood pine, 4 differentsamples70 SW 0.67–0.75 9Wood pine, 4 differentsamples70 LW 0.81–0.89 9Wood planed 20 T 0.8–0.9 1Wood planed oak 20 T 0.90 2Wood planed oak 70 SW 0.77 9Wood planed oak 70 LW 0.88 9Wood plywood, smooth,dry36 SW 0.82 7Wood plywood,untreated20 SW 0.83 6Wood white, damp 20 T 0.7–0.8 1Zinc oxidized at 400°C 400 T 0.11 1Zinc oxidized surface 1000–1200 T 0.50–0.60 1Zinc polished 200–300 T 0.04–0.05 1Zinc sheet 50 T 0.20 1#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 219
A note on the technical production of this publicationThis publication was produced using XML — the eXtensible Markup Language. For more informationabout XML, please visit http://www.w3.org/XML/A note on the typeface used in this publicationThis publication was typeset using Linotype Helvetica™ World. Helvetica™ was designed by MaxMiedinger (1910–1980)LOEF (List Of Effective Files)T501248.xml; en-US; AA; 42549; 2017-05-09T505552.xml; en-US; 9599; 2013-11-05T505469.xml; en-US; 39689; 2017-01-25T505013.xml; en-US; 39689; 2017-01-25T506130.xml; en-US; 40879; 2017-03-06T506156.xml; en-US; 42495; 2017-05-06T506141.xml; en-US; 42495; 2017-05-06T506142.xml; en-US; 42495; 2017-05-06T506143.xml; en-US; 42495; 2017-05-06T506144.xml; en-US; 42495; 2017-05-06T506145.xml; en-US; 42291; 2017-04-27T506146.xml; en-US; 41444; 2017-03-21T506147.xml; en-US; 42286; 2017-04-27T506148.xml; en-US; 41444; 2017-03-21T506149.xml; en-US; 42495; 2017-05-06T506150.xml; en-US; 42495; 2017-05-06T506151.xml; en-US; 41258; 2017-03-14T506152.xml; en-US; 41261; 2017-03-14T506153.xml; en-US; 41785; 2017-03-31T506154.xml; en-US; 42027; 2017-04-11T505476.xml; en-US; 39581; 2017-01-20T506159.xml; en-US; 41787; 2017-03-31T505012.xml; en-US; 41563; 2017-03-23T505007.xml; en-US; 39512; 2017-01-18T506125.xml; en-US; 40753; 2017-03-02T505000.xml; en-US; 39687; 2017-01-25T506155.xml; en-US; 42220; 2017-04-26T506051.xml; en-US; 40460; 2017-02-20T505005.xml; en-US; 41563; 2017-03-23T505001.xml; en-US; 41563; 2017-03-23T505006.xml; en-US; 41563; 2017-03-23T505002.xml; en-US; 39512; 2017-01-18#T810253; r. AA/42549/42549; en-US 220
last pagePubl. No.: T810253Release: AACommit: 42549Head: 42549Language: en-USModified: 2017-05-09Formatted: 2017-05-09Websitehttp://www.flir.comCustomer supporthttp://support.flir.comCopyright© 2017, FLIR Systems, Inc. All rights reserved worldwide.DisclaimerSpecifications subject to change without further notice. Models and accessories subject to regional market considerations. License procedures may apply.Products described herein may be subject to US Export Regulations. Please refer to exportquestions@flir.com with any questions.

Navigation menu